JP6847506B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of imparting an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

Whether or not to give a game machine such as a pachinko game machine an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the game ball wins (passes) in a predetermined area provided on the game board. When the judgment result is obtained that the identification information is variablely displayed and the advantageous state is given, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode to shift to the advantageous state. There is. In the advantageous state, a round game in which the variable winning device provided on the game board is opened and then closed is executed a plurality of times, and when the game ball wins the variable winning device in the open state, a predetermined number of games are played. The ball is paid out.

In such a game machine, every time a game ball wins in a predetermined area, information indicating that the game ball has won a prize in a predetermined area (starting) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). It is possible to store (hold) a plurality of (stored information), and the game is performed by sequentially repeating the variable display and the stop display of the identification information based on the start storage information. Further, when the start storage information is stored, a determination result of whether or not to give an advantageous state before the variation display (the variation) of the identification information in the game corresponding to the stored start memory information is started. Memorize the information indicating. As a result, it is possible to give a big hit notice (notice regarding the advantageous state) before the fluctuation is started.

In such a game machine, an effect prompting the player to operate the external input switch is displayed, and when the external input switch is operated, the jackpot expectation degree indicating the high probability of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. It has been proposed to give a big hit notice by displaying it (see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2007-105247

However, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, since it is only determined whether or not the jackpot expectation is displayed depending on whether or not the external input switch is operated, the effect content of the jackpot notice is There was a problem that it became monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of giving a notice regarding a more interesting advantageous state.

The present invention
An advantageous state determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display unit 54) that displays variations in identification information based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means.
An effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) for producing an effect,
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the effect execution means,
It is provided with an operation means (for example, a pressing operation button 9A) capable of accepting a predetermined operation of the player.
The effect executing means can perform a specific effect (for example, an operation-linked effect).
The specific effect sequentially shifts a plurality of effect stages (for example, "0" to "11"), and when the final effect stage is reached, a predetermined effect (for example, a supermarket) is used. Reach C) is performed,
For each of the production stages in the plurality of production stages, one of a predetermined production stage and a specific production stage (for example, a conditional stage transition period) can be set.
It is configured so that the predetermined production stage may be set in the next production stage of the production stage in which the specific production stage is set.
The specific effect includes at least a first effect pattern in which the predetermined effect stage is set as the final effect stage and a second effect pattern in which the specific effect stage is set as the final effect stage. Including
The effect control means is used in the specific effect.
When the current production stage is the predetermined production stage, it is decided by lottery whether or not to move to the next production stage on the condition that the predetermined operation is performed, and according to the decision result. Move to the next production stage,
When the current production stage is the specific production stage, the predetermined operation is always performed after the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed). It is a game machine characterized by shifting to the next production stage.

In the present invention, when a plurality of production stages (for example, "0" to "11") are sequentially shifted to the final production stage, a predetermined production (for example, Super Reach C) is performed. In the production (for example, operation-linked production), when the current production stage is a predetermined production stage, a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation to the pressing operation button 9A) is performed, provided that the predetermined operation is performed. Whether or not to shift to the next production stage is decided by lottery, and if it is a specific production stage (for example, a conditional stage transition period), after the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, the conditional stage transition period). It is configured to always shift to the next production stage on the condition that a predetermined operation is performed after (after a lapse). With this configuration, it is possible to give a more interesting big hit notice.

Further, the present invention is characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, a conditional stage transition period) has elapsed in the specific production stage. Is.

Further, in the present invention, when the current production stage is a specific production stage and a predetermined operation is performed after a predetermined period (for example, a conditional stage transition period) has elapsed, the following is always performed. It is configured so that the stage is shifted to the production stage, and if a predetermined operation is performed before the predetermined period elapses, the stage is not shifted to the next production stage. With this configuration, in a specific effect, it is possible to create a state in which the effect stage does not shift even if a predetermined operation is performed, and a state in which the effect stage always shifts when a predetermined operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player who has been able to smoothly shift the production stage, and it is possible to diversify the production.

In addition, the present invention
The above-described operation means is characterized in that, in the specific effect, when the current effect stage is the specific effect stage, the operation cannot be accepted during the predetermined period. It is a game machine.

Further, in the present invention, when the current production stage is a specific production stage, a predetermined operation is invalidated in a predetermined period. With such a configuration, it is possible to control the production so as to be more linked to the operation of the player at a specific production stage, and it is possible to improve the interest in the production.

In addition, the present invention
The specific effect includes a first specific effect pattern (for example, successful operation-linked effect) that may shift to the final effect stage, and a second specific effect that does not have the possibility of shifting to the final effect stage. (For example, operation-linked production failure), and
The effect control means is either a case where the specific effect is performed based on the first specific effect pattern or a case where the specific effect is performed based on the second specific effect pattern. Even if there is, if a specific time (for example, operation-linked effect effective time) has elapsed since the start of the specific effect, the specific effect is terminated.
When the specific effect performed based on the first specific effect pattern is terminated, if the final effect stage has not been reached, a notice for notifying that the predetermined effect will be performed. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the predetermined effect is performed after the effect (for example, operation-linked effect failure → reverse effect) is performed.

Further, in the present invention, even when a specific effect is performed based on a specific effect pattern (for example, successful operation-linked effect) that may shift to the final effect stage, the process shifts to the final effect stage. In this case, the advance notice effect (for example, operation-linked effect failure → reverse effect) for notifying that the predetermined effect will be performed is performed, and then the predetermined effect is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to give a certain expectation for a big hit when a specific production is performed, while diversifying the transition of the production stage.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of giving a notice regarding a more interesting advantageous state.

It is an external perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram which shows the game state and the effect mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the spec of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the one-round opening and closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the main variation pattern determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead hold change pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead hold change pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation hold change pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation hold change pattern determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation interlocking effect scenario determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation interlocking production stage transition determination table of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect content for each operation interlocking effect scenario of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect content for each operation interlocking effect scenario of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario determination table in RUSH mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before reopening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interrupt processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing operation button operation determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pressing operation button operation determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in RUSH mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the item effect processing in RUSH mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing in the normal mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display mode change effect processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start processing of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the operation interlocking effect of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the operation interlocking effect of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the operation interlocking effect of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the takeover selection operation screen of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the music selection operation screen of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example in the RUSH mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the item used in the item production in RUSH mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the item effect in RUSH mode of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the hold display mode change effect of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the effect at the time of V prize of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the grand prize opening of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening opening / closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Structure of game machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. 1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board used in the game machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a main body frame base to which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball can roll and flow is detachably provided. A main body frame 2 provided with a plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and a front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) in which the game board 1 can be visually recognized. A front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (referred to as a player), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3). Is provided with a detachable rear frame base plate (not shown), and a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side). I have.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. Note that FIG. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In such a state, the rear frame is , Because it is housed in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

The front frame 3 has a front frame base plate 3a and various front frame constituent members provided in the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right side decorative member 15, left side decorative member 16) and the like. The table frame constituent members are not limited to these, and include all the members that constitute the front frame 3. Further, in the plate unit 8, each cover member (upper plate upper cover 8a, lower plate cover 8b, etc.) is attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

In the front frame 3, a protective glass 7 having transparency is provided in the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window portion) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back surface side (rear side) of the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 2 so as to face the surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the surface (front surface) side thereof. In the upper part of the front frame 3, speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of the decorative member, a top decoration 14 incorporating a patrol lamp accessory described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right sides of the front frame opening 3h. A right side decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) and a left side decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) that can be changed are provided.

Inside the right-side decorative member 15 and the left-side decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp, LED 27, etc.) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later is provided (see FIG. 6). .. The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, and is perceived by the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16 as synchrotron radiation, diffused light, or the like having excellent aesthetics. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode by light, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a dish unit 8 is provided below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The plate unit 8 includes an upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower plate 18 provided below the upper plate 17 and capable of storing, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full. Is provided.

The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, and an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper portion of the upper plate main body 17p. It is provided with an upper plate decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance of the upper plate 17. As an example of the upper plate decorative member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c, etc. so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the upper plate front decoration 17c. Has a shape bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a to the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side via the front side.

The front frame base plate 3a has a payout port 20 for paying out the game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front plate base plate 3a (not shown). ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, there is a ball passage for a game ball to be discharged from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), and a ball passage cover (illustrated) for forming a ball passage by communicating the discharge port and the supply port 21. (Omitted) is provided. When the game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the upper plate 17 is so large that the game ball stays near the payout port 20 although the game ball is paid out. When the ball is full or when the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are moved from the discharge port through the ball passage and the supply port 21 to the lower plate. It is sent to 18.

In the present embodiment, the plating member is used for the decoration of the front surface of the game machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front surface portion of the upper plate 17. By using the plated member 17b, the decorative effect of the appearance design of the game machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

The upper plate cover 8a includes a ball lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player operating (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. The arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, but as an example in the drawing, the push operation button 9A is projected vertically from the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the outer circumference of the push operation button 9A is projected. The operation unit 9 configured to arrange the jog dial 9B is shown in.

Regarding the front frame 3, the portion of the surface (front surface) on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side is illegal, for example, a piano wire or the like. It is possible to envision a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act is performed by the fraudulent member with respect to various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the portion.

Therefore, in order to prevent such fraudulent activity, a cover member with a wiring holding function (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at a portion where the above-mentioned fraudulent member invades. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating with the fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to separately prepare a member for each of these functions. The cost can be reduced accordingly.

The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided in the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituent members include a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards, relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. At the same time, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

The launching device 26 includes a panel body 26a for arranging the launching device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching handle 26b arranged on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. It is arranged on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the back side of the main body frame, and is provided with a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball.

A notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the dish unit 8 described above. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 exhibit an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

The launch handle 26b is provided in a support portion (not shown), a handle gup 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion and can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise, and a game. It is arranged so as to cover the launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball, the launch stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning the launch stop switch ON / OFF, and the opening of the handle grip 26d. It is equipped with a handle cap 26h.

When the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the launching drive device is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle), and the driving force at that time is stored in the upper plate 17. The game ball being played is launched toward the game area 1p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. At this time, when the launch stop button 26e is operated, the launch drive device is stopped and controlled, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

In the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6) controls the operation of the launch stop switch and the launch handle 26b. Inside the launching device 26, a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction is provided, and the player can make the spring member elastic. The game ball is launched by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction.

When the player interrupts the game and releases the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the starting position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the launch of the game ball is stopped by pressing the launch stop button 26e by the protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

Here, as a method of increasing or decreasing the firing intensity of the game ball, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b, and the firing solenoid (not shown). It is known that the firing intensity of the game ball is increased or decreased by changing the electric power supplied to (omitted). However, in the launching device 26 of the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b is performed. A firing spring (not shown) interlocking with the firing spring (not shown) and a gear mechanism (not shown) for winding (tightening) the firing spring are provided. In the launching device 26, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b, and the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring is strengthened or weakened, thereby causing a game ball. The firing intensity of is changed to increase or decrease.

The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower part of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, the portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). It has become.

The game board 1 is arranged in front of the rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. are doing. The game board 1 is made of a material having translucency (for example, polycarbonate or the like), but may be formed of a material having no translucency such as plywood or the like.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first starting port 32, a second starting port 33, a blade member 34 for opening and closing the second starting port 33, and a passing gate 35. The 1st big winning opening 36, the 2nd big winning opening 37, the 1st big winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the 1st big winning opening 36, the 2nd big winning opening shutter 37A that opens and closes the 2nd big winning opening 37, the second A specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B located on the lower side of the large winning opening 37, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40, an out opening 41, an upper movable effect member 42A, and a lower movable effect. It includes a member 42B, a cover member 43, a liquid crystal display device 4, and an LED unit 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the passing gate 35, the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, the specific area 38A, and the general winning opening 40 The winning area is formed by. Note that FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed.

The guide rail 30 is composed of an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is arranged so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged inside the outer rail on the left side of the game board 1. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side thereof.

The stage 31 distributes the flowing region of the game ball in the game region 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The game ball launched by the launching device 26 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) driven into the game board 1 or a stage 31 or the like. In this process, the game ball is collected by winning any of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40, and also If the prize is not won, or if the prize is not won after passing through the passing gate 35, the prize is collected by being discharged from the out port 41.

The winning means that the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area, a favorable situation for the player (for example, opening of the second starting port 33, a symbol lottery, a prize ball, etc., which will be described later) is given. Means to do. At this time, the passage of the winning area by the game ball means a mere passage, and the entry of the winning area by the game ball means that the game ball is collected separately from the out opening 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passing and entering the ball are substantially synonymous. Therefore, since both the passing of the game ball and the winning ball in the winning area lead to winning, in the present embodiment, the expression “winning” will be used unless otherwise specified. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, it may be referred to as "V winning".

When the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively small, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally small, so that the game ball mainly flows down the left side of the stage 31. Further, when the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force given to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball mainly flows down the right side of the stage 31. In general, a method of hitting a game ball flowing down to the left side of the stage 31 is called "left-handed hitting", and a method of hitting a game ball flowing down to the right side of the stage 31 is called "right-handed hitting".

The first start port 32 and the second start port 33 give an opportunity for a lottery on the condition that the game ball wins a prize, and also give an opportunity to display the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It is what you give. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 realize the first starting area and the second starting area.

The first starting port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 32, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

The second starting port 33 is provided directly below the first starting port 32. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 33 is determined by the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected by the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is in an open state that enables or facilitates a prize for the game ball to the second starting port 33. It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 33. The blade member 34 is driven by the blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

The ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the one that operates the blade member 34 so as to open and close in the front-rear direction. For example, a so-called electric tulip type that expands the starting port by rotating the game board 1 in the left-right direction. Or a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the starting port by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33. The winning of the game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball wins a prize at the passing gate 35, no prize ball is generated.

The first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are opened in the hit gaming state (big hit gaming state), which is an advantageous state for the player. The first large winning opening 36 is provided on the substantially right side of the first starting opening 32 and directly below the passing gate 35. The second large winning opening 37 is provided on the substantially right side of the second starting opening 33 and directly below the first large winning opening 36. The positions where the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 are arranged are not limited to the above-mentioned positions, and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the game machine and the like.

The first large winning opening 36 is formed in the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large horizontally long dimension so that a plurality of game balls can win at the same time. A first large winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first large winning opening 36 is provided in the vicinity of the first large winning opening 36. The winning of the game ball into the first winning opening 36 is detected by the first winning opening count switch 360 (see FIG. 6).

The second large winning opening 37 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having a relatively small vertical and horizontal dimensions so that the game balls can be won one by one. A second large winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second large winning opening 37 is provided in the vicinity of the second large winning opening 37. The winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 37 is detected by the second winning opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 6).

The first large winning opening shutter 36A switches the first large winning opening 36 to an open state or a closed state by opening and closing the game board 1 so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction. It is arranged so as to cover the first large winning opening 36 in the closed state. That is, the first special winning opening shutter 36A changes into an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 36 or easily, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. It is driven by the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A (see FIG. 6).

The second large winning opening shutter 37A switches the second large winning opening 37 to an open state or a closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and the second large winning opening 37 is moved in the closed state. It is arranged so as to cover it. That is, the second special winning opening shutter 37A changes between an open state in which the game ball can be won in the second special winning opening 37 or easily, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. It is driven by the second prize opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

The specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are areas through which the game ball winning the second large winning opening 37 can pass thereafter, and are covered with the cover member 43. The ball passage of the game ball from the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the cover member 43. The game ball that has won the second large winning opening 37 passes through either the specific area 38A or the non-specific area 38B, and then is guided to the back of the game board 1 and collected. The second major winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at a position in the middle of the ball passage from the second winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. Further, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided in the vicinity of the specific region 38A.

The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A between the open state and the closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 changes into an open state (first state) in which the V-winning of the game ball into the specific region 38A is possible or easy, and a closed state (second state) in which V-winning is impossible or difficult. As described above, it is driven by the displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 6). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball for which V winning is impossible will pass through the non-specific area 38B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 36, the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, and the first large winning opening count switch 360 are the first variable winning devices. It has been realized. The second large winning opening 37, the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the second large winning opening count switch 370 realize the second variable winning device.

One or more general winning openings 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 40, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6), although the lottery is not performed. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the non-probability / non-time saving gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are non-probability / non-probability / non-probability / non-time saving gaming states as normal game states controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later. Probability change game state (special game state) that is higher than non-time saving game state, time saving game state where the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than non-probability change / non-time saving game state, and probability change / time saving game state (probability change game state) If there is a normal game state (normal game state), which is a time-saving game state, and the special symbol lottery is won in the normal game state, the game shifts to the big hit game state (specific game state).

In the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high, so that the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric pitcher facilitates the winning of the second starting port 33. This state is a so-called "electric support" state, in which the reserved balls of the special symbol game described later can be easily accumulated, and the loss of the game balls can be suppressed by winning the second starting port 33. Specifically, the time-saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-saving game state 1), and a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time-saving game state 2). ), It means at least one of the states in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory is relatively long (time saving game state 3). For example, the time-saving game state includes a state in which the time-saving game state 1, the time-saving game state 2, and the time-saving game state 3 proceed simultaneously in any combination. In such a time-saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

After the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is successfully completed in the jackpot gaming state, the game always shifts to the probabilistic gaming state and does not shift to the non-probability changing gaming state. On the other hand, if the jackpot gaming state ends with the non-V winning without succeeding in V winning in the specific area 38A, the game shifts to the non-probability changing gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In addition, when the special symbol lottery (20 times of variable display and stop display of the special symbol) is performed in the probabilistic game state, the game shifts to the non-probable game state. The probabilistic gaming state that ends by performing such a predetermined number of special symbol lottery is also referred to as an ST (Special Time) gaming state. After the end of the big hit game state, the probabilistic game state may be maintained until the next big hit game state is entered.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the specific jackpot game state, the game always shifts to the time-saving game state and does not shift to the non-time-saving game state. On the other hand, after the end of the big hit game state that is not a specific big hit game state, the game shifts to the non-time saving game state. In addition, when the special symbol lottery (100 times of variable display and stop display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times in the time-saving game state, the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state. After the end of the specific jackpot gaming state, the time-saving gaming state may be maintained until the next jackpot gaming state is entered.

The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 when not operating, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. It is located in. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotational operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower part of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and emits light.

The cover member 43 is provided to form the second special winning opening 37, and is attached below the first large winning opening 36. The cover member 43 forms a second large winning opening 37 by opening a part of the upper end surface thereof. With the cover member 43 attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is located in the opening corresponding to the second prize opening 37. Further, a guide piece 43a for guiding the game ball toward the second special winning opening 37 is provided on the front side edge portion of the upper end surface of the cover member 43. Inside the cover member 43, a ball passage is formed from the opening corresponding to the second special winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B via the second special winning opening count switch 370. Such a cover member 43 is arranged so as to cover the second special winning opening count switch 370, the specific area switch 380A, and the non-specific area switch 380B.

The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each game state and lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the ordinary symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, and the first 2. It has a special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol reservation display unit 55, a second special symbol reservation display unit 56, and a round display unit 59. Although not shown in particular, the lamps and LEDs 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 and the like include those corresponding to the character appearance notification lamps, and the transition to the jackpot game state is confirmed. Lights (or blinks) when a special character (hereinafter, also referred to as "SP character") appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during a part of the special symbol change in the game state or in the big hit game state. It has become like.

The ordinary symbol display unit 51 drives the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory when the game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35, and determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33. The lottery result for "game" is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be lit in red and blue, for example, and is lit in red when the LED lamp is won in the normal symbol game, while it is lit in blue when the LED lamp is lost in the normal symbol game. When the LED lamp 511 of the normal symbol display unit 51 is lit, for example, in red, the blade member 34 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to allow the game ball to win the second starting port 33. It should be noted that the lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game may be another lighting mode. For example, in the case of winning, the lighting state or the blinking state is set, while in the case of losing, the lighting mode is turned off. You may do it.

In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524. If this is the case, the number of times that the variation display of the normal symbol that is reserved for the next and subsequent variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 can be performed is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are located on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side in a row together with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, for example, when the number of holds is "1", the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is "2", the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is "3", the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holdings is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are lit.

The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 show the result of a winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol”) that serves as identification information when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 32, and the first The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 32 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “second special symbol”) that serves as identification information when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 33, and also displays the second. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 33 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol related to the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 realize the identification information display means.

The variation display of the symbol by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed by, for example, using a 7-segment LED or the like and repeatedly turning on / off each segment individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the first special symbol and the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the second special symbol have different modes. The hit symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and can shift to the probability change / time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, "big hit 1" to "big hit 4" (probability change). In principle, the jackpot symbol (time saving hit), the jackpot symbols of "big hit 5" and "big hit 6" (time saving hit) that can shift to the probabilistic / non-time saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There is a big hit symbol of "big hit 7" (normal hit) that shifts to the non-probability change / non-time saving game state (see FIG. 8). The hit symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and can shift to the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. ) Has a big hit design (see Fig. 8). The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to the 7-segment LED and the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551,552,553,554, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 551,552,553,554. Or, for the variation display of the first special symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the first start port 32 while the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying the variation of the symbol for the special symbol game. Displays the number of times (the number of holds) that the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held in can be executed. The second special symbol holding display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 wins a new game ball in the second starting port 33 during the variable display of the symbol for the special symbol game, it is reserved for the variable display of the symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games. The number of times the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed (number of holds) is displayed. Each of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 is arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display unit 52. The display mode of the number of holds on the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of holds on the normal symbol hold display unit 52.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 and the second special symbol holding display unit 56 move to the first starting port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. The game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the ball passage or the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If so, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display 54 is stopped and displayed, the reserved first special symbol display 53 or the second special symbol display 54 is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is started.

Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. In the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the first start port 32 and the first are set. 2. The maximum number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the starting port 33 is four. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63 (FIG. The information of the first special symbol game for four times stored and held as the start storage (start storage information) in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of 6) is the first special symbol start storage area (see 6). 1) -It is stored as a start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (4). Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held for four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 (the second special symbol start storage area ( The information of the second special symbol game for four times stored in 0) as the start memory (start memory information) is the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). ) Is stored as a start memory. Therefore, the maximum number of winning prizes held in both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, is eight in total.

In addition, in place of the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, the liquid crystal display device 4 , The hold of winning a prize at the first starting port 32 and the holding of winning a prize at the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

The round display unit 59 lights up while the hit symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of times related to the round game described later when the big hit game state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591,592,593, and indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot game state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591,592,593. In the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is 12 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "12R"), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. Further, for example, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot game state having a number of rounds different from the above number of rounds is set, the LED lamp 592 or 593 is turned on and the other LED lamps are turned off. Can be done. The number of rounds (number of times) may mean the entire number of times the round game (round game) is executed, or may mean the number of orders indicating the order in which the round games are sequentially executed. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, it is described as, for example, "12 rounds" or "12R", and when it means the latter, it is described as, for example, "12Rth". Further, in the following description, the "round game" may be simply referred to as a "round".

As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged substantially in the center thereof so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images related to the game, such as an identification symbol for production, a production image in the normal game state, and a production during the big hit game state. It displays an image, a production image for demo display, and the like. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is adapted to display the identification information in a variable manner on condition that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes an effect display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 constitute the effect execution means. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, these effect executing means are also used as notification means.

[Electrical configuration of game machines]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, the “switch” is abbreviated as “SW” and the “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 as a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 as a read / write memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 62. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 realizes an advantageous state determination means (specific game state transition determination means), a specific game state control means, a special game state control means, and a round game execution means.

A first start port switch 320 arranged behind the first start port 32 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed by the main CPU 61. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to give an advantageous state.

A second start port switch 330 arranged behind the second start port 33 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed by the main CPU 61. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to give an advantageous state.

These first start port switch 320 and second start port switch 330 are regarded as winning when it detects that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, and give a predetermined detection signal. It is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

A passing gate switch 350 arranged behind the passing gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 350, it is assumed that the game ball has won a prize in the passing gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this ordinary symbol lottery is displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51, an effect image for the player to grasp that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is won is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may do so.

The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that it has won a prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. As a result, the passing gate switch 350 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33.

The general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B arranged behind the general winning opening 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1 are connected to the main control circuit 60. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a preset number of winning balls are performed by the payout device 83.

The first large winning opening count switch 360 arranged behind the first large winning opening 36 is connected to the main control circuit 60. The first large winning opening count switch 360 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the first large winning opening count switch 360, the payout device 83 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 to the upper plate 17 or the lower side. Pay out to the plate 18.

The second major winning opening count switch 370 arranged behind the second winning opening 37 is connected to the main control circuit 60. The second major winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 to the upper plate 17. Alternatively, pay out to the lower plate 18.

These 1st big winning opening count switch 360 and 2nd big winning opening count switch 370 mainly control a predetermined detection signal when the game ball passes through the 1st big winning opening 36 and the 2nd big winning opening 37. It is supplied to the circuit 60.

A specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are connected to the main control circuit 60. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that a V prize is won when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a non-V prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area 38B in the big hit game state.

The main control circuit 60 includes a first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A for driving the first large winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first special winning opening 36, and a second large winning opening shutter that opens and closes the second special winning opening 37. It exclusively controls the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A that drives 37A. As a result, the first grand prize opening shutter 36A changes into an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first grand prize opening 36 or is easily opened, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. In a situation where the first prize opening 36 is at least closed, the second prize opening shutter 37A is in an open state in which a game ball can or easily wins a game ball in the second prize opening 37. It is driven so that the winning of the game ball changes to an impossible or difficult closed state. The opening drive of the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 by the first special winning opening shutter 36A and the second special winning opening shutter 37A is the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display. This is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the part 54 and is shifted to the jackpot game state.

The main control circuit 60 controls the blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode on the normal symbol display unit 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second starting port 33. It will be easier.

For example, in the ordinary symbol game of the present embodiment, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the gaming state (that is, “low probability time”) that is not the time saving gaming state is 1/65536 (see FIG. 8), and in most cases, the blade member 34 is never released. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state (that is, “high probability time”) is 65534/65536 (see FIG. 8), and in most cases, the blade member 34 is opened three times for 1.3 seconds. In addition, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the gaming state (that is, "low probability time") that is not the time saving gaming state may be set to 0 (that is, the non-winning is determined without being drawn). Further, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the time-saving game state (that is, "high probability time") may be set to 1 (that is, the winning is determined without being drawn by lottery).

The main control circuit 60 controls the displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific region 38A. As a result, when the round game described later is being executed in the jackpot game state, the displacement member 39 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball can be passed through the specific area 38A or easily. Become. On the other hand, if the displacement member 39 is in the closed state even in the big hit game state, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 is the first when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. 1 The first based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of pending executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the number of pending cases related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held as the number of pending numbers related to the first special symbol is started.

The second special symbol holding display unit 56 is the second when a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. 1 The second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of pending executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the number of pending cases related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of pending numbers related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variably displayed in the order of winning in the order of winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33.

Further, as described above, an upper limit is set for the number of pending executions of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 is set in the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33. When the game ball wins a prize and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of hold numbers for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, respectively. (That is, the number of detections is 4), and the 5th and subsequent ones are not stored as the number of pending items. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the number of holdings is added again up to 4 pieces.

When the number of the first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 53 is, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol display unit 53 is the information of the main RAM 63. 1 Special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start memory, and thereafter, the information of the special symbol game for which the number of reservations is 4 is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. It is sequentially stored as a start memory.

Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of reserved second special symbol games is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol display unit 54 corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start storage in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game for which the number of reservations is 4 is the second special symbol game of the main RAM 63. 2 The special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start memory.

Therefore, the total number of game balls held for the special symbol game associated with winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 is a maximum of eight, and the first special symbol holding display unit 54 and the second special symbol are held. The number of hold displays by LEDs 551 to 554 and LEDs 561 to 564 of the hold display unit 55 is also four, respectively.

In the open state of the first large winning opening 36 by the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the first large winning opening count switch 360 becomes a predetermined number (for example, eight winnings). It is maintained until either one of the conditions is satisfied, such as the elapse of a predetermined opening time described later. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first large winning opening shutter 36A has elapsed, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven to close the first large winning opening 36. Will be done.

Similarly, in the open state of the second large winning opening 37 by the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the second large winning opening count switch 370 is a predetermined number (for example, the number of winnings is eight). However, it is maintained until either of the conditions such as the elapse of a predetermined opening time described later is satisfied. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second big winning opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the second big winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the second big winning opening 37. Will be done.

In the big hit game state, the open state and the closed state of the first big prize opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are repeated based on the preset large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, each of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Is called a "round game". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 is closed by one round game, the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37 will be opened as the next round game. The state up to is also referred to as "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or simply "interval". In one round game, each of the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 may be opened and closed a plurality of times. Further, in one round game, the open / closed state of the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37 is exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning opening is continuously closed.

Although the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is not provided with a so-called small hit gaming state as a gaming state having a property different from that of the big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state may be provided. Unlike the big hit game state, the small hit game state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and for example, the second big winning opening 37 is defined to be open only once. However, when the small hit game state is provided, the arbitrary or specific large winning opening may be controlled so as to be repeatedly opened a plurality of times. Further, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state may be shifted to a gaming state different from the gaming state before shifting to the small hit gaming state, and the gaming state before shifting to the small hit gaming state may be used. It may be returned to.

Round games are counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including drawings referred to in the description), the numbered "rounds" such as the first round or the first round are simply "R" such as 1R, 2R, 4R, 12R, and the like. ] May be omitted. In addition, in one round game, the maximum number of winnings per round is reached before the first major winning opening 36 or the second major winning opening 37 is opened a predetermined number of times. When it reaches, the 1st prize opening 36 and the 2nd prize opening 37 will be closed, and the 1st prize opening 36 and the 2nd prize opening 37 will not be opened for the remaining number of times of opening. , The round game is terminated.

Further, in a specific round game in which the second big winning opening 37 is opened in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. As a result, the specific area 38A is in the open state and the closed state in the specific round game in the jackpot game state. That is, in a specific round game, the game ball may pass through the specific area 38A and win a V prize, while in a round game other than the specific round game, the game ball tentatively wins a prize in the second large winning opening 37. Even if this is done, the game ball cannot or is difficult to pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the types of the jackpot game state (specific game state) include the jackpot game state including the specific round game (first specific game state) and the jackpot game state not including the specific round game (second specific game state). There is.

In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is composed of numbers except in a specific case. Designs (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as "0", "1", "2" ... "7" are displayed in three columns.

On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the changed or stopped special symbol has a specific stop display mode, the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Specifically, in either the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a "big hit" in which many balls can be obtained. When the display is stopped, the combination of decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is in a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows). In addition, the effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The main CPU 61 included in such a main control circuit 60 is put into a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the first starting area (first starting port 32). It functions as a first specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, on condition that the gaming medium has passed through the second starting area (second starting port 33). It functions as a second specific game state transition determination means.

Further, the main CPU 61 is a specific game state control means for controlling the game state to the specific game state on condition that the determination result of shifting to the specific game state is obtained by the first or second specific game state transition determination means. Functions as.

Further, the main CPU 61 determines that, on condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area 38A in the specific game state, after the specific game state ends, the main CPU 61 shifts to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means. Functions as a special game state control means for controlling a special game state (probability variation game state) in which is relatively easy to obtain.

Further, in the specific game state, the main CPU 61 changes the first variable winning device (first large winning opening shutter 36A) into the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the first round game (round). It functions as a first round game execution means for executing the game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as the first round game execution means, can control the first variable winning device to be changed to the first mode and the second mode during at least one first round game execution.

Further, the main CPU 61 changes the second variable winning device (second large winning opening shutter 37A) into the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific game state in the second round game (round). It functions as a second round game execution means for executing the game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as the second round game execution means, has a specific round game mode in which it is relatively easy for the second variable winning device to pass the game medium through the specific area 38A during at least one second round game execution. It is possible to perform a specific second round game in which control for changing to the first aspect and the second aspect is performed. Further, during the execution of at least one other round game, the second variable winning device is changed to the first mode and the second mode in a predetermined round game mode in which it is relatively difficult for the game medium to pass through the specific area 38A. It is also possible to control.

In the jackpot game state, the first-round game execution means executes a specific number of first-round games, and the second-round game execution means executes at least one specific second-round game. The game state includes a second specific game state in which the first round game is executed a specific number of times by the first round game execution means, and the specific second round game is not executed by the second round game execution means.

A specific example of control of the main CPU 61 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The main ROM 62 stores programs and various tables for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes described later, including functions as the means of the main CPU 61 described above.

The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable / writable storage medium may be used instead of the main RAM 63.

The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub-control circuit 70.

The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when the power is cut off.

Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first prize opening shutter solenoid 360A, a second prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, a blade member solenoid 340, a displacement member solenoid 390, and an external terminal plate 80. ..

The external terminal board 80 is located between a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and displaying the number of big hits, or an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko game machines installed in the hall. It is for data communication with.

Various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start port switch 320, a second start port switch 330, a passing gate switch 350, a first special winning opening count switch 360, and a second major winning opening count switch 370. , Specified area switch 380A, non-specific area switch 380B, general winning opening left switch 400A, general winning opening right switch 400B, and backup clear switch 81.

The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and the payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to an operation by the hall manager.

Further, the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to the main control circuit 60 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / launch control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to each other. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize the game value-adding means.

The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of a game ball according to the operation of the player, and can transmit and receive a signal to and from the ball lending operation panel 85. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. For example, the payout device 83 pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls for each prize in the first starting port 32, and three game balls as the number of prize balls for each prize in the second starting port 33. 4 or 3 as the number of prize balls per winning to the general winning opening 40 (for example, 4 in the case of winning the general winning opening 40 located on the left side of the game board 1), the game board 1 Pay out the game balls (3 in the case of winning in the general winning opening 40 located on the right side), and 14 games as the number of winning balls per winning in the 1st big winning opening 36 or the 2nd big winning opening 37 Pay out the ball.

The payout / launch control circuit 82 is a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the launch handle 26b of the launch device 26 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. Is supplied with electric power to control the game ball to be launched toward the game area 1p.

The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes the timer interrupt process as the interrupt process even during the execution of the main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured so that commands are supplied from the main control circuit 60.

The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and is a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. It has a circuit 76, a voice control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79. A liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the voice control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to a movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

Further, in the sub-control circuit 70, a push-button switch 90A provided on the push-button 9A is connected, and a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B is connected to the sub-control circuit 70. The push-button switch 90A detects the operation of the push-button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. A push-button switch 90A supplies a push-button switch 90A to the sub-control circuit 70, and a rotation operation signal is supplied from the jog dial switch 90B. The push-button 9A and the jog dial 9B function as operating means capable of accepting operations related to the player's production.

The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as an effect display means, and the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c function as music output means. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 realizes an effect control means for controlling each function related to such an effect. The program ROM 72 and the work RAM 73 realize the storage means.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a symbol variation display means in the symbol variation display area 700 described later, and functions as a hold information display means in the first reserved ball display area 701 and the second reserved ball display area 702 described later. It functions as the fluctuation information display means in the fluctuation holding ball display area 703, which will be described later. Further, it functions as a first information display means for displaying the first information (holding ball described later) in the first holding ball display area 701, the second holding ball display area 702, which will be described later, and the variable holding ball display area 703 described later. To do. In addition, it functions as a second information display means for displaying second information (items to be described later) in the item display area 800.

Further, the sub CPU 71 functions as a look-ahead expectation notification effect means for controlling the look-ahead hold change effect described later, and functions as the change expectation notification effect means for controlling the change hold change effect described later. It functions as a first display mode determining means for determining the display mode of the information (holding ball), and functions as a second display mode determining means for determining the display mode of the second information (item).

A specific example of control of the sub CPU 71 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The program ROM 72 stores a program and various tables for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects.

The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by promptly supplying power to the work RAM 73 at the time of power failure.

The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 71, for example, for generating various image data with an image data processor (VDP). It is composed of an image data ROM that stores data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraudulent notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

The voice control circuit 77 is for controlling the sound (sound, music, etc.) output from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. For example, a sound source IC that controls the sound and sound data that stores various sound data. It includes a ROM and an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying sound signals. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and is one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Sound data can be selected.

Further, the sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and outputs the sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c.

The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling a lamp / LED 27 including a decorative lamp, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of. The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also an example, and is not limited to this.

The movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (swings) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the pressing operation button 9A or the like during the valid period of the operation on the operation unit 9, for example, in the big hit game state. Etc.) to control the production operation.

[Game state and production mode of the game machine]
Next, the gaming state and the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the gaming states other than the jackpot gaming state include non-probability / non-time-saving game state (normal game state), probabilistic / non-time-saving game state, non-probability / time-saving game state, and probabilistic / time-saving game. The state is implemented, and in FIG. 7, the non-probability / non-time-saving gaming state is indicated as "non-probability & non-time-saving", the probabilistic / non-time-saving gaming state is indicated as "probability 20 times", and the non-probability / non-time-saving gaming state Is shown as "time saving 100 times", and the probability change / time saving game state is shown as "probability change 20 times & time saving 100 times". Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a normal mode, a special mode, and a RUSH mode as production modes of a gaming state other than the jackpot gaming state.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state by hitting the first special symbol is 12R for probability variation time reduction, 8R-1 for probability variation time reduction, 8R-2 for probability variation time reduction, and probability variation time reduction. 4R, 4R-1 per probability variation, 4R-2 per probability variation, and 8R per normal, a big hit game state by hitting the second special symbol, 12R-1 per time reduction medium, 12R-2 per time reduction medium, 8R per time reduction medium, And 4R per probabilistic time reduction is implemented (see FIG. 8), and in FIG. 7, 12R per probabilistic time reduction, 8R-1 per probabilistic time reduction, 8R-2 per probability variation time reduction, and 4R per probability variation time reduction are referred to as "probability variation time reduction middle". 4R-1 per probability variation and 4R-2 per probability variation are indicated as "during probability variation", 8R per normal variation is indicated as "during normal hit", 12R-1 per time reduction medium, 12R-2 per time reduction medium time, 8R per time reduction medium and 4R per time reduction medium are indicated as "time reduction medium hit medium". Although not shown in FIG. 7, a plurality of effect modes are implemented as the effect modes in the jackpot game state.

The normal mode is an effect mode corresponding to a non-probability change / non-time saving game state, and is a special mode, a RUSH mode, or an effect mode in which the player stays when neither of them is hit. For example, in the special mode, when 20 special symbol games are digested, the special mode shifts to the normal mode. Further, in the RUSH mode, when 100 special symbol games are digested, the RUSH mode shifts to the normal mode. In addition, during the probability variation hit transition from the normal mode, when a non-V prize is obtained and the big hit game state ends, the probability variation hit is shifted to the normal mode. In addition, during the normal hit transition from the normal mode, when a non-V prize is obtained and the big hit game state ends, the normal hit mode is transitioned to the normal mode.

Further, in the normal mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start storage information of the first special symbol described above, it is a big hit game state by hitting the first special symbol. It shifts to hitting, probabilistic hitting, or normal hitting. Although not shown in FIG. 7, in the normal mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start storage information of the second special symbol described above, the second special symbol is displayed. 2 In some cases, the game may shift to a short-time medium-time hit, which is a big hit game state due to a special symbol hit.

Further, as a specific display mode of the decorative symbol in the normal mode, any combination mode of "1" to "7" is stopped and displayed, but when the combination mode of "7" is stopped and displayed. Is determined to be a jackpot symbol corresponding to the "big hit 1" (hit pattern 1) of the first special symbol. Further, when the stop display is displayed as a combination mode of "1", "3" or "5", the jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol "big hit 2" to "big hit 4" (hit patterns 2 to 4). There is a high possibility that it is a symbol (that is, there is a high expectation that it will shift to RUSH mode), and it is possible that it is a jackpot symbol corresponding to the first special symbol "big hit 5" to "big hit 7" (hit patterns 4 to 7). Low (ie, low expectation of transition to RUSH mode). Further, when the stop display is displayed as another combination mode, there is a high possibility that the jackpot symbol corresponds to the first special symbol "big hit 5" to "big hit 7" (hit patterns 4 to 7) (that is,). It is unlikely that it is a jackpot symbol corresponding to the first special symbol "big hit 2" to "big hit 4" (hit patterns 2 to 4) (that is, transition to RUSH mode). Expectations are low). However, if a specific character symbol other than a number is further provided as a decorative symbol and the display is stopped as a combination mode of this specific character symbol, there is a possibility that it is any of the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol. You may. As described above, in the normal mode, in the case of shifting to the big hit game state due to the second special symbol hit, during the time saving and middle hit, at least the RUSH mode is shifted after the big hit ends. , The combination mode of "7" may be stopped and displayed as the combination mode of the decorative symbols, or the combination mode of the decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed with the same configuration as that in the special mode or RUSH mode described later. It may be.

The normal stage and the special stage of the normal mode are the production stages that are the elements that determine the production mode in the non-probability / non-time saving game state, and shift from the special mode, the RUSH mode, the probability variation hit, and the normal hit to the normal mode. In that case, the player first shifts to the special stage, and when the special symbol game is completed 10 times in the special stage, the special stage shifts to the normal stage. For example, one or more of the decorative pattern image data, the background image data, the frequency of the effect, the appearance rate of the specific effect, and the like are different between the normal stage and the special stage. It should be noted that the normal stage and the special stage are transferred to each other when other transition conditions such as the result of the jackpot determination being a predetermined result or the elapse of a predetermined predetermined time are satisfied. You may do so. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who is playing a game in the normal mode from losing the interest in the game.

The special mode is an effect mode corresponding to the probabilistic / non-time saving game state, and during the probabilistic hit transition from the normal mode, when the big hit game state ends with a V prize, or during the normal hit transition from the normal mode. In this mode, the mode shifts to when the V prize is won and the jackpot game state ends. In addition, the special mode ends when 20 special symbol games are digested without shifting to the jackpot game state. Further, in the special mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start storage information of the first special symbol described above, the game shifts to the big hit game state by hitting the first special symbol. Further, although the illustration is omitted in FIG. 7, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start storage information of the second special symbol described above, the second special symbol is hit. It shifts to the big hit game state by. In the special mode, after all of these jackpot game states (“promotion hit” in FIG. 7) are completed, the mode shifts to the RUSH mode.

As a specific display mode of the decorative symbol in the special mode, the combination mode of the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed in the same configuration as that in the normal mode described above. For example, the first special symbol may be displayed. When "big hit 1" (hit pattern 1) (or "big hit 6" and "big hit 7" (hit patterns 8 and 9) of the second special symbol) is determined, "big hit 1" is used as a combination mode of decorative symbols. The combination mode of "7" is stopped and displayed, and the first special symbol "big hit 2" to "big hit 6" (hit patterns 2 to 6) (or the second special symbol "big hit 8" and "big hit 9" (hit) When the patterns 10 and 11)) are determined, the combination mode of "1", "3" or "5" is likely to be stopped and displayed, and the other combination modes are difficult to be stopped and displayed. However, when the "big hit 7" (hit pattern 7) of the first special symbol is determined, other combination modes are likely to be stopped and displayed as the combination mode of the decorative symbol, and "1", "3" or "1", "3" or " It is possible to make it difficult for the combination mode of "5" to be stopped and displayed, and to suggest the degree of expectation of the presence or absence of the probabilistic gaming state when shifting to the RUSH mode.

The RUSH mode is an effect mode corresponding to the probabilistic / short-time game state or the non-probable / short-time game state. This is an effect mode that shifts when the jackpot gaming state ends in, or when the jackpot gaming state ends during the time saving and middle hits that shift from any mode. In addition, the RUSH mode ends when 100 special symbol games are digested without shifting to the jackpot game state, regardless of whether the game is in the probabilistic / short-time game state or the non-probable / short-time game state.

Further, in the RUSH mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start memory information of the second special symbol described above, it is a big hit game state by hitting the second special symbol. It shifts to hitting, and after the end of hitting, it shifts to RUSH mode again. Although not shown in FIG. 7, in the RUSH mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the start storage information of the first special symbol described above, the first 1 There is a case where the game shifts to the big hit game state by hitting a special symbol, but after the end of this big hit game state, the mode shifts to the RUSH mode again.

As a specific display mode of the decorative symbol in the RUSH mode, the combination mode of the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed in the same configuration as that in the above-mentioned normal mode or special mode. For example, a second display mode may be used. If the special symbols "Big hit 6" and "Big hit 7" (hits patterns 8 and 9) (or the first special symbol "Big hit 1" (hit pattern 1)) are determined, a combination of decorative symbols When the combination mode of "7" is stopped and displayed as the mode and the "big hit 8" (hit pattern 10) of the second special symbol is determined, the combination mode of the decorative symbols is "1", "3" or When the combination mode of "5" is likely to be stopped and displayed, the other combination modes are difficult to be stopped and displayed, and other jackpots are determined, the other combination modes are likely to be stopped and displayed as the combination mode of the decorative symbol. , "1", "3" or "5" may be made difficult to stop and displayed, suggesting the actual number of rounds in the jackpot game state in the RUSH mode.

The battle production section of the RUSH mode is executed from the time of shifting to the RUSH mode, and basically continues until 87 special symbol games are digested. In this battle production section, a production that displays the battle scene between the ally character (hero character) and the enemy character (competition character) is executed, and when it is decided to reach as the production content, the battle with the hero character is performed. The result of the jackpot judgment is notified by executing the battle production with the character and displaying the victory or defeat. In addition, when a winning effect is executed in a specific battle effect (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach" or "Special Character Battle Reach" described later), the history (winned character history) is memorized and the player wins. Music related to the opponent character is provided to the player. In the RUSH mode, the player can arbitrarily select the acquired music (acquired music) and play the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of enemy characters that give rise to a common idea are set as battle characters. Specifically, for example, 12 battle characters (characters 1 to 12) that give rise to a common idea such as 12 branches, 12 constellations, or January to December are set, and the degree of continuation of the RUSH mode (that is, that is). Depending on the number of jackpot consecutive villas in the RUSH mode), the achievement level of the winning characters and the acquired songs is updated, or a series of stories progresses, and it is possible to enhance the fun of the game.

In the battle production section of the RUSH mode, the production content is determined in the same manner regardless of whether the game state is the probability variation game state, and the fluctuation pattern is also determined in the same manner. (See FIG. 12). That is, the battle effect section in the RUSH mode can be executed across between the probabilistic / time-saving game state and the non-probability / time-saving game state. With this configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation in the RUSH mode and enhance the interest of the game regardless of whether or not the game is in the probabilistic game state.

The transformation effect section of the RUSH mode is executed from the end of the battle effect section of the RUSH mode, and basically continues until the end of the RUSH mode. In this transformation production section, in the 88th to 99th special symbol games in the RUSH mode, the above-mentioned 12 battle characters appear one by one, and whether or not the appearing battle characters are transformed (that is, whether or not the characters are transformed). The result of the jackpot determination is notified depending on (whether or not the display mode changes). Further, in the 100th special symbol game in the RUSH mode, the jackpot determination is made depending on whether or not the above-mentioned hero character appears and the appearing hero character transforms (that is, whether or not the display mode of the character changes). The result will be announced.

During the probability variation time reduction, as described above, in the normal mode, the probability variation time reduction hit 12R, the probability variation time reduction 8R-1, the probability variation time reduction 8R-2, or the probability variation time reduction hit, which is the big hit game state by the first special symbol hit. It shows that it has shifted to 4R. During the probability change time saving hit, if the big hit game state ends with a V prize, the mode shifts to the RUSH mode as the probability change / time saving game state, and if the non-V prize occurs and the big hit game state ends, It shifts to the RUSH mode as a non-probability change / time saving game state. In addition, during the probability variation time short hit, for example, a plurality of effect modes having different selection probabilities depending on the type of big hit may be set.

During the probability variation hit, as described above, in the normal mode, it indicates that the player has shifted to the probability variation per 4R-1 or the probability variation per 4R-2, which is the big hit game state due to the first special symbol hit. Further, during the normal hit, as described above, it indicates that the normal mode has shifted to the normal hit 8R, which is the big hit game state due to the first special symbol hit. During the probability change hit or the normal hit, when the V prize is awarded and the big hit game state ends, the mode shifts to the special mode as the probability change / non-time saving game state, and the non-V prize is obtained and the big hit game state ends. In that case, it shifts to the normal mode as a non-probability change / non-time saving game state.

During the promotion hit, as described above, it indicates that the player has transitioned to one of the big hit gaming states in the special mode. During the promotion hit, if the V prize is won and the big hit game state ends, the mode shifts to the RUSH mode as the probability change / time saving game state, and if the non-V prize is given and the big hit game state ends, it is not. It shifts to the RUSH mode as a probable change / time saving game state. During the promotion hit, for example, a plurality of effect modes having different selection probabilities depending on the type of big hit may be set.

During the time saving middle hit, as described above, in the RUSH mode, it is a big hit game state by the second special symbol hit, the time saving middle hit 12R-1, the time saving middle hit 12R-2, the time saving middle hit 8R, or the time saving middle hit. It shows that it has shifted to 4R. During the time saving middle hit, if the big hit game state ends with a V prize, the mode shifts to the RUSH mode as a probability change / time saving game state, and if the non-V prize occurs and the big hit game state ends, It shifts to the RUSH mode as a non-probability change / time saving game state. In addition, during the time saving middle hit, for example, a plurality of effect modes having different selection probabilities depending on the type of big hit may be set.

It should be noted that even if the production modes are not shown and explained, the transition is possible with the transition of the gaming state, and the mode is not limited to the range shown and explained.

[Game machine specifications]
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, specifications relating to the gaming characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the special symbol is 1 / 149.97 (437/65536) when the probability is low (non-probability changing game state), and when the probability is high (probability changing game state). ) Is 1 / 19.56 (3351 / 65536). As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is prioritized for digestion. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation game state), the ST game state in which the probability variation game state continues up to 20 times as the number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is implemented.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the big hit symbol "big hit 1" of the first special symbol, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) is the hit pattern 1, and the number of rounds of the round game is 12R (of which the actual number of rounds that can easily win the big winning opening is 12R) is given, and the round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4th R, and after the end of the big hit game state, the time-saving game state is set (probability variation time-shortening 12R). The probability (rush rate) of "big hit 1" as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 12/100.

The jackpot symbol "big hit 2" of the first special symbol becomes a hit pattern 2, and the number of rounds is 8R (of which the actual number of rounds is 4R), the round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4th round, and the jackpot game state. After the end, the game will be in a time-saving game state (8R-1 per probability variation time-saving). The rush rate of the jackpot symbol "big hit 2" of the first special symbol is set to 3/100.

The jackpot symbol "big hit 3" of the first special symbol becomes a hit pattern 3, and the number of rounds is 8R (of which the actual number of rounds is 4R), the round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4th round, and the jackpot game state. After the end, the game will be in a time-saving game state (8R-2 per probability variation time-saving). The rush rate of the jackpot symbol "big hit 3" of the first special symbol is set to 2/100.

The jackpot symbol "big hit 4" of the first special symbol becomes a hit pattern 4, and the number of rounds is 4R (of which the actual number of rounds is 4R), the round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4th round, and the jackpot game state. After the end, the game will be in a time-saving game state (4R per probability variation time-saving). The rush rate of the jackpot symbol "big hit 4" of the first special symbol is set to 3/100.

The jackpot symbol "big hit 5" of the first special symbol becomes a hit pattern 5, and the number of rounds is 4R (of which the actual number of rounds is 4R), and the round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4th round. After the end of the jackpot game state that has shifted from the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is not set, and the non-time-saving game state is set. However, after the end of the non-probability / time-saving game state, the probability-change / non-time-saving game state, and the jackpot game state transitioned from the probability-change / time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is set (4R-1 per probability change). The rush rate of the jackpot symbol "big hit 5" of the first special symbol is set to 20/100.

The jackpot symbol "big hit 6" of the first special symbol becomes a hit pattern 6, and the number of rounds is 4R (of which the actual number of rounds is 4R), and the round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4th round. After the end of the jackpot game state that has shifted from the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is not set, and the non-time-saving game state is set. However, after the end of the non-probability / time-saving game state, the probability-change / non-time-saving game state, and the jackpot game state transitioned from the probability-change / time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is set (4R-2 per probability change). The rush rate of the jackpot symbol "big hit 6" of the first special symbol is set to 20/100.

The jackpot symbol "big hit 7" of the first special symbol becomes a hit pattern 7, and the number of rounds is 8R (of which the actual number of rounds is 7R). After the end of the jackpot game state that has shifted from the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is not set, but the non-time-saving game state is set. However, after the end of the non-probability / time-saving game state, the probability-change / non-time-saving game state, and the jackpot game state transitioned from the probability-change / time-shortening game state, the time-saving game state is set (normally 8R per hit). The rush rate of the jackpot symbol "big hit 7" of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

In the big hit symbol "big hit 6" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 8, the number of rounds is 12R (of which the actual number of rounds is 12R), the round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4th R, and the big hit game state. After the end, the game will be in a time-saving game state (12R-1 per time-saving medium). The rush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 6" of the second special symbol is set to 9/100.

In the big hit symbol "big hit 7" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 9, the number of rounds is 12R (of which the actual number of rounds is 12R), the round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4th R, and the big hit game state. After the end, the game will be in a time-saving game state (12R-2 per time-saving medium). The rush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 7" of the second special symbol is set to 3/100.

In the big hit symbol "big hit 8" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 10, the number of rounds is 8R (of which the actual number of rounds is 8R), the round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4th R, and the big hit game state. After the end, the game will be in a time-saving game state (8R per time-saving medium). The rush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 8" of the second special symbol is set to 45/100.

In the big hit symbol "big hit 9" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is 11, the number of rounds is 4R (of which the actual number of rounds is 4R), the round that facilitates V winning is set to the 4th R, and the big hit game state. After the end, the game will be in a time-saving game state (4R per time-saving medium). The rush rate of the big hit symbol "big hit 9" of the second special symbol is set to 43/100.

The number of large winning openings is set so that the maximum number of winnings per round is 8 for both the 1st major winning opening 36 and the 2nd major winning opening 37. The time saving performance (specification of the time saving game state) is set so that the time saving game state continues up to 100 times. The number of prize balls is 3 for each prize in the first starting port 32, 3 for each prize in the second starting port 33, and 4 or 3 for each prize in the general winning opening 40. Therefore, it is set that the number of prizes per prize in the large prize openings (1st large prize opening 36 and 2nd large prize opening 37) is 14.

The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to be 1/65536 at a low probability and 65534/65536 at a high probability. Although not shown in FIG. 8, the number of hit symbols of a normal symbol is set to 2 (distribution 1/2).

[1 round opening / closing pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening in one round will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to D are defined as one-round opening / closing patterns (one-round opening / closing patterns) in the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37. In the present embodiment, it may be simply described as a "large winning opening" as indicating both the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37. The opening / closing patterns A to D shown in FIG. 9 are merely examples, and the specific time and the like for defining the opening / closing pattern may be other than those shown in the figure.

The opening / closing pattern A is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state of the first large winning opening 36 (large winning opening 1) continues for 27.996 s. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in other opening / closing patterns, the round section is defined as the period from the first open state to the final closed state. In the section where the open state is 27.996 s, the open state of the first large winning opening 36 is a relatively long long opening. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, the long opening of the first large winning opening 36 occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 27.996 s.

The opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state of the first large winning opening 36 (large winning opening 1) continues only for 0.102 s. In the section where the open state is 0.102 s, the open state of the first large winning opening 36 is a relatively short short opening. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, the short opening of the first large winning opening 36 occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 0.102 s.

The opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern in which the second large winning opening 37 (large winning opening 2) is initially open for 0.048 s, then closed for 3 s, and then opened again for 27.948 s. .. In the section where the open state is 0.048 s, the open state of the second big winning opening 37 is a relatively short short opening, and in the section where the open state is 27.948 s, the open state of the second big winning opening 37 is. It will be a relatively long long opening. That is, in the opening / closing pattern C, after the short opening of the second large winning opening 37 occurs once, the long opening occurs once after passing through the closed state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 27. It becomes .996s. In the open state where the short opening is made, it is extremely difficult to win the game ball into the large winning opening, while in the open state where the long opening is made, it is possible and easy to win the game ball into the large winning opening. ing. Such short opening is the same in the opening / closing pattern D described later.

The opening / closing pattern D is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state of the second large winning opening 37 (large winning opening 2) continues only for 0.048 s. In the section where the open state is 0.048 s, the open state of the second large winning opening 37 is a relatively short short opening. That is, in the opening / closing pattern D, the short opening of the second winning opening 37 occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern D is 0.048 s.

As described above, the substantial round game in the big hit game state corresponds to the round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing pattern A or C described above. Then, the round game when the opening / closing is controlled based on the opening / closing pattern B or D is a non-substantial round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific region 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / closed state of the second special winning opening 37. As shown in FIG. 10, as for the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern), as a general rule, the specific area 38A is closed after the operation period for opening the specific area 38A is initially 0.036 s. It is defined as an operation pattern in which the non-operation period is 4.012 s, and then the operation period continues for a maximum of 29.144 s. The total operating time of the displacement member operating pattern is 29.180 s. During the operation period of 0.036s, the open state of the specific area 38A becomes relatively short, so that it becomes extremely difficult to win a V prize in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, during the operation period of 29.144 s at the longest, the open state of the specific region 38A is relatively long, so that V winning in the specific region 38A becomes relatively easy. However, for the maximum operating period of 29.144s, in one round in which the second large winning opening 37 is opened and closed, for example, when the number of large winning opening counts reaches the upper limit winning number, the second large winning opening 37 is closed. When the state is reached and the predetermined monitoring processing time for the residual sphere, which will be described later, has passed, the displacement member 39 is inactive and the specific area 38A is closed even before the predetermined maximum 29.144 s has elapsed. May become.

In the present embodiment, the displacement member 39 is actuated / deactivated to substantially facilitate or make it difficult to win the V prize, and the specific area switch 380A operates / deactivates the variable member 39. It is possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A regardless of the operation. That is, the period during which the V prize is valid is not set. However, the mode of control that facilitates or makes V winning easy or difficult is not limited to this, and for example, the detection state of the specific area switch 380A is changed in conjunction with the operation / non-operation of the displacement member 39. There may be. Specifically, when the transfer member 39 is operating (in the open state), the specific area switch 380A makes it possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A, and the transfer member 39 operates. If not (in the closed state), the specific area switch 380A may make it undetectable that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A. That is, the period during which the V prize is valid may be set. In this case, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 38A in a period other than the period in which the V prize is valid, the V prize is not obtained and the transition to the probabilistic gaming state can be prevented.

[Large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 11 are defined as the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). The hit pattern 1 is a hit pattern corresponding to 12R per probability variation time reduction, and the number of rounds specified for the rounds that are generally open (hereinafter referred to as "specified number of rounds") is 12R, and the winning opening is entered. This is a hit pattern in which the actual number of rounds in which a prize can be won is defined as 12R. In addition, the interval between rounds is a section in which the big winning opening is closed after the last big winning opening is closed in one round until the big winning opening is first opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as the pattern of the interval between rounds, the interval pattern a in which the closed state (closing time) is 2034 ms, the interval pattern b in which the closed state is 300 ms, and the interval pattern c in which the closed state is 3000 ms. Is stipulated. In the hit pattern 1, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is the interval pattern b, the interval between the 4th and 5th rounds is the interval pattern c, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as the interval pattern a. There is. Further, it is defined that the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C at the 4th round, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 12th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 1 has 12 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 12th rounds, and is executed as a round in which it is easy to win a V prize in the specific area 38A only in the 4th round.

The hit patterns 2 and 3 are hit patterns corresponding to the probability variation time reduction 8R-1 and the probability variation time reduction 8R-2, and are the hit patterns in which the specified number of rounds is 8R and the actual number of rounds is 4R. In the hit patterns 2 and 3, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is the interval pattern b, the interval between the 4th and 5th rounds is the interval pattern c, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as the interval pattern a. Has been done. Further, it is defined that the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C in the 4th round, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 3rd rounds. That is, the hit patterns 2 and 3 are 4 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 4th rounds, and only the 4th round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern corresponding to a probability variation time reduction hit of 4R, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 4R and the actual number of rounds is 4R. In the hit pattern 4, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is defined as the interval pattern b, and the other intervals between the rounds are defined as the interval pattern a. Further, it is defined that the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C in the 4th round, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 3rd rounds. That is, the hit pattern 4 is executed as a round in which the actual number of rounds is 4 rounds from the 1st round to the 4th round, and only the 4th round can easily win a V in the specific area 38A.

The hit patterns 5 and 6 are hit patterns corresponding to 4R-1 per probability variation and 4R-2 per probability variation, and are hit patterns in which the specified number of rounds is 4R and the actual number of rounds is 4R. In the hit pattern 4, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is defined as the interval pattern b, and the other intervals between the rounds are defined as the interval pattern a. Further, it is defined that the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C in the 4th round, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 3rd rounds. That is, the hit pattern 4 is executed as a round in which the actual number of rounds is 4 rounds from the 1st round to the 4th round, and only the 4th round can easily win a V in the specific area 38A.

The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern corresponding to a normal hit of 8R, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 8R and the actual number of rounds is 7R. In the hit pattern 7, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is the interval pattern b, the interval between the 4th and 5th rounds is the interval pattern c, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as the interval pattern a. There is. Further, it is defined that the first large winning opening 36 has the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 3rd R and the 5th to 8th R. That is, the hit pattern 7 is 7 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 8th rounds, and the round in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is easy is not executed.

The hit patterns 8 and 9 are hit patterns corresponding to 12R-1 per time reduction and medium time and 12R-2 per time reduction and medium time, and are hit patterns in which the specified number of rounds is 12R and the actual number of rounds is 12R. In the hit patterns 8 and 9, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is the interval pattern b, the interval between the 4th and 5th rounds is the interval pattern c, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as the interval pattern a. Has been done. Further, it is defined that the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C at the 4th round, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 12th rounds. That is, the hit patterns 8 and 9 are 12 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 12th rounds, and only the 4th round is executed as a round in which it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A.

The hit pattern 10 is a hit pattern corresponding to 8R per time reduction and medium time, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 8R and the actual number of rounds is 8R. In the hit pattern 10, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is the interval pattern b, the interval between the 4th and 5th rounds is the interval pattern c, and the other inter-round intervals are defined as the interval pattern a. There is. Further, it is defined that the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C at the 4th round, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 8th rounds. That is, the hit pattern 10 has 8 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is the 1st to 8th rounds, and is executed as a round in which it is easy to win a V prize in the specific area 38A only in the 4th round.

The hit pattern 11 is a hit pattern corresponding to 4R per time reduction and medium time, and is a hit pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 4R and the actual number of rounds is 4R. In the hit pattern 11, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is defined as the interval pattern b, and the other intervals between the rounds are defined as the interval pattern a. Further, it is defined that the second big winning opening 37 becomes the opening / closing pattern C in the 4th round, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st to 3rd rounds. That is, the hit pattern 11 is executed as a round in which the actual number of rounds is 4 rounds from the 1st round to the 4th round, and only the 4th round is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A.

In addition, in the hit patterns 1 to 6 and 8 to 11, a round (specific second round game) in which it is easy to win a V in the specific area 38A is executed only in the 4th round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific second round game may be executed in other rounds (1st to 3rd rounds and 5th to 12th rounds). Further, in these hit patterns, a plurality of specific second round games may be executed. Further, in each of the above-mentioned hit patterns including these hit patterns, the second big winning opening 37 is opened, but a round (usually a second round game) in which it is difficult to win a V in the specific area 38A is executed. May be. Further, in FIG. 11, as the interval between rounds, the portion where the interval pattern a is defined may be defined as the interval pattern b or c, and the portion where the interval pattern b is defined may be defined as the interval pattern a or c. Alternatively, the place where the interval pattern c is defined may be defined as the interval pattern a or b. That is, various modifications can be made according to the effect mode in the effect mode of the jackpot game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled by the hit patterns 1, 8 and 9, since the actual number of rounds is 12, the number of game media that the player can acquire (expected acquisition). The number of game media) is the largest, and when the jackpot game state is controlled by the hit pattern 10, the actual number of rounds is 8, so the expected number of game media to be acquired is the second largest, and the jackpot game is based on the hit pattern 7. When the state is controlled, since the actual number of rounds is 7, the number of expected game media to be acquired is the third largest, and when the big hit game state is controlled by other hit patterns, the actual number of rounds is 4. Since it is a round, the number of expected game media to be acquired is the smallest.

However, the mode in which the number of expected game media to be acquired is different is not limited to this. For example, by making the number of prize balls when the game ball enters the first prize opening 36 different from the number of prize balls when the game ball enters the second large prize opening 37, the expected winning game The number of media may be different. Specifically, the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the first prize opening 36 is eight, and the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the second prize opening 37 is four. To do. Then, when the second round game can be executed a plurality of times as described above, in the hit pattern 9, the second round game is executed more times than in the hit pattern 8. Further, for example, the expected number of game media may be different by making the maximum number of winnings of the first large winning opening 36 different from the maximum number of winnings of the second large winning opening 37. Specifically, the maximum number of winnings of the first large winning opening 36 is set to 8, and the maximum number of winnings of the second large winning opening 37 is set to 4. Then, when the second round game can be executed a plurality of times as described above, in the hit pattern 9, the second round game is executed more times than in the hit pattern 8. Even in this way, it is possible to make the expected number of game media to be acquired different.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 18 and 21. The table defines lottery value (random number value) information for determining a predetermined item based on a lottery value (random number value) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. Value information is synonymous with the so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, the "random number value" may be simply referred to as a "random number".

<Main fluctuation pattern determination table>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a main fluctuation pattern determination table. The main variation pattern determination table is used by the main CPU 61 to determine the mode of variation display and stop display of the special symbol (variation pattern) and the time from the variation display of the special symbol to the stop display (variation time). It is a table to be used, and it is a game state (non-probability / non-time saving game state corresponding to the normal mode, probabilistic / non-time saving game state corresponding to the special mode, or probabilistic / time saving game state corresponding to RUSH mode or non-probability / time reduction / time reduction. Types of fluctuation patterns determined according to various parameters such as game state), jackpot determination result (win), reach determination random number range (0 to 250), and effect selection random number range (0 to 99). Is specified, and if the game state is a probabilistic / time-saving game state or a non-probability / time-saving game state corresponding to the RUSH mode, is the number of games "1-87 times" (RUSH mode battle)? Different types of fluctuation patterns are defined depending on whether it is an effect section), or "88 to 99" or "100 times" (whether it is a transformation effect section in RUSH mode).

The main CPU 61 determines the variation content of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 by determining the variation pattern and the variation time using the main variation pattern determination table. At the same time, by transmitting a variation pattern specification command capable of recognizing the variation content of the special symbol to the sub CPU 71, the sub CPU 71 can perform variation display and stop display of the decorative symbol linked to the variation content of the special symbol. It has become. The main fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 shows an example, and the fluctuation pattern, fluctuation time, or other factors to be determined are not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation pattern is further subdivided into a look-ahead hold change pattern (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the change hold change pattern (see FIGS. 15 and 16), or a pseudo-ream (during the change of the special symbol), which will be described later. It is also possible to determine the number of times (pseudo-ream number) that the temporary stop / re-variation is executed (which makes it appear as if a plurality of symbol changes have been made in a pseudo manner). That is, it is also possible that these elements are determined when the main CPU 61 determines the fluctuation pattern.

The reach determination random number range defines a range of reach determination random numbers that determines whether or not to execute reach. The reach determination random number value is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first start port 32 or the second start port 33 in each game state. Further, the effect selection random number range defines the range of the effect selection random number that determines the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time, and the effect content with respect to the reach determination random number range. The effect selection random value is extracted from an effect selection counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first start port 32 or the second start port 33 in each game state.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, for example, in the normal mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined to execute the reach, the variation pattern is set to 20/100 with a selectivity. "08H" is selected. The fluctuation pattern “08H” is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 120,000 ms (120 s) and the effect content is “operation-linked effect success → super reach C loss”. When "08H" is selected as the variation pattern, the operation-linked effect described later is executed, and the effect develops after the operation-linked effect is executed (operation-linked effect succeeds), and is compared with other reach effects. The super reach C effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed, and finally it is shown that the result of the big hit determination is a loss without the decorative symbol having a specific display mode.

Further, in the normal mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined not to execute the reach, "04H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern with a selection rate of 10/100. The variation pattern "04H" is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 30,000 ms (30 s) and the effect content is "operation-linked effect failure". When "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, the operation-linked effect described later is executed, but the effect does not develop after the operation-linked effect is executed (operation-linked effect fails), and the decorative pattern is finally specified. It is shown that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss without the display mode of.

Further, in the normal mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, "12H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern with a selection rate of 30/100. The fluctuation pattern “12H” is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 121000 ms (121 s) and the effect content is “operation-linked effect success → per super reach C”. When "12H" is selected as the variation pattern, the operation-linked effect described later is executed, and the effect develops after the operation-linked effect is executed (operation-linked effect succeeds), compared with other reach effects. The super reach C effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed, and finally the decorative symbol becomes a specific display mode, and it is shown that the result of the big hit determination is a hit.

In the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined in the special mode in the same manner as in the normal mode, and the description of the determined variation pattern, the variation time, and the effect content is omitted. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the special mode, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern may be determined with different selection probabilities, or one or a plurality of fluctuation patterns peculiar to the special mode may be set.

Further, in the 1st to 87th times of the RUSH mode, when the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss and it is decided to execute the reach, "14H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern with a selection rate of 50/100. Will be done. The fluctuation pattern "14H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 100,000 ms (100 s) and the production content is "Kakekko Battle Reach Loss". When "14H" is selected as the variation pattern, the production in which the main character and the opponent character determined by the decision order of the scenario in RUSH mode, which will be described later, or the lottery battle is executed and the race is performed. As a result, it is shown that the main character is defeated and the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

Further, in the 1st to 87th times of the RUSH mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, "17H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern with a selection rate of 50/100. The fluctuation pattern "17H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 101000 ms (101 s) and the effect content is "per Kakekko Battle Reach". When "17H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern, a battle is executed between the battle character determined by the decision order of the scenario in RUSH mode, which will be described later, or by lottery, and the main character, and the race is performed. As a result, it is shown that the main character wins and the result of the big hit judgment is a hit.

Further, in the 1st to 87th times of the RUSH mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, "18H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern with a selection rate of 10/100. The fluctuation pattern "18H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 81000 ms (81 s) and the production content is "per special character battle reach". When "18H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern, character 1 is selected as the opponent character regardless of the decision order of the scenario in RUSH mode, which will be described later, and the production in which the character 1 and the main character are battled by a race is executed. At the same time, as a result of the race, it is shown that the main character wins and the result of the big hit judgment is a hit. It should be noted that the content of the battle effect to be executed may be different between "Kakekko Battle Reach Hit" and "Special Character Battle Reach Hit". Further, this fluctuation pattern "18H" is selected only when the result of the jackpot determination is a specific jackpot (for example, 12R-1 or 12R-2 per time reduction) that gives the most profit. You may. That is, the production of "special character battle reach hit" may be a production in which a specific jackpot with the largest amount of profit is determined.

Further, in the 88th to 99th times of the RUSH mode, when the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss and it is decided to execute the reach, "19H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern with a selection rate of 50/100. Will be done. The fluctuation pattern "19H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 10000 ms (10 s) and the effect content is "normal reach (transformation failure) loss". When "19H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern, whether or not the opponent character (for example, character 1 for the 88th time, character 12 for the 99th time) is transformed according to the number of games in the RUSH mode (display). A transformation effect indicating (whether or not the mode changes) is executed, and the result of the jackpot determination is shown to be lost without finally transforming (the display mode does not change) (transformation failure). It has become like.

Further, in the 88th to 99th times of the RUSH mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, "21H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern with a selection rate of 50/100. The fluctuation pattern "21H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 11000 ms (11 s) and the effect content is "per normal reach (successful transformation)". When "21H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern, whether or not the opponent character (for example, character 1 for the 88th time, character 12 for the 99th time) is transformed according to the number of games in the RUSH mode (display). A transformation effect indicating (whether or not the mode changes) is executed, and finally the transformation (display mode changes) (transformation success) indicates that the result of the jackpot judgment is a hit. It has become.

In the 88th to 99th times of the RUSH mode, the variation pattern in which the transformation effect is always performed may be selected. That is, if the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, the opponent character according to the number of games in the RUSH mode executes the effect of failing to transform, and if the result of the jackpot judgment is a hit, the game in the RUSH mode. Depending on the number of opponent characters, the effect of successful transformation may be executed. With this configuration, even if the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, the effect that all the opponent characters appear is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting, and also It is possible to improve the interest of the production using a plurality of characters.

Further, in the 100th time of the RUSH mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, "23H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern with a selection rate of 100/100. The fluctuation pattern "23H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 15000 ms (15 s) and the effect content is "transformation failure (loss)-> ball output display". When "23H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern, a transformation effect indicating whether or not the main character is transformed (whether or not the display mode is changed) is executed, and finally the main character is not transformed (displayed). (The mode does not change) (transformation failure), it is shown that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. In addition, when the transformation fails, the number of game balls acquired during the RUSH mode is displayed.

Further, in the 100th time of the RUSH mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, "24H" is selected as the fluctuation pattern with a selection rate of 100/100. The fluctuation pattern "24H" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 20000 ms (20 s) and the effect content is "transformation success (hit)". When "24H" is selected as the variation pattern, a transformation effect indicating whether or not the main character is transformed (whether or not the display mode is changed) is executed, and finally the character is transformed (display mode). (Changes) (successful transformation), and the result of the jackpot judgment is shown to be a hit.

<Read-ahead pending change pattern determination table>
13 and 14 are diagrams showing an example of a look-ahead pending change pattern determination table. The look-ahead hold change pattern determination table is a table referred to in the hold display mode change effect processing (see FIG. 53 described later) controlled by the sub CPU 71, and is the result of the jackpot determination (winning), the first special symbol game, or the first. 2 The type of look-ahead hold change pattern (pre-read hold change effect content) that is determined according to various parameters such as the number of holds (number of holds) of the special symbol game, the fluctuation pattern, and the random number range for sub-effect selection. It is stipulated. The specific control of the look-ahead hold change effect using the table will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the start of the first reserved ball display area 701 and the second special symbol that display each of the start memory (holding ball) of the first special symbol in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in a predetermined display mode. Of the reserved balls displayed in the second reserved ball display area 702 and the first reserved ball display area 701 or the second reserved ball display area 702 that display each of the stored numbers (reserved numbers) in a predetermined display mode. The variable hold ball display area 703 for displaying the hold ball digested in the current game (the change) in a predetermined display mode is provided (see FIG. 61 described later), and these are used in any of the production modes. The holding ball is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the start ports (first start port 32 and second start port 33), whether or not it hits, the type of hit, and the content of the effect are determined in advance. It has become.

The look-ahead hold change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 shows the display mode of the hold balls displayed in the first hold ball display area 701 and the second hold ball display area 702 before being digested as the variation. It is used to determine whether or not to change, and it is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree by changing the display mode of the holding ball by executing a so-called "look-ahead effect".

In the present embodiment, as an example of the display mode of the holding ball, the display mode (white), the display mode (blue), the display mode (yellow), the display mode (green), the display mode (red), and the display mode ( A rainbow) is provided, and the display mode (white) is the normal display mode. The jackpot expectation (that is, the possibility that the result of the jackpot determination is a hit) is the lowest in the display mode (white), the display mode (blue), the display mode (yellow), the display mode (green), and the display mode (red). ), It becomes higher. In addition, the display mode (rainbow) is such that the jackpot is fixed. However, the display mode (rainbow) may appear even when the jackpot expectation is extremely high but the jackpot is not fixed and the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

In the look-ahead hold change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the start storage number (hold number) of the first special symbol is "1", and the fluctuation pattern is as follows. When "05H" is determined, "look-ahead hold change pattern 104" is selected as the look-ahead hold change pattern at a selection rate of 11/100. When the "look-ahead hold change pattern 104" is selected, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 32, the hold ball in the display mode (blue) is held to indicate the hold ball used in the next variation. The ball is displayed in the first reserved ball display area 701, and when the fluctuation indicated by the reserved ball starts, the holding ball is changed to the display mode (yellow).

The "look-ahead hold change pattern 104" is a display mode that is a normal display mode, for example, indicating a hold ball used in the next variation when the game ball passes through the first start port 32. The reserved ball of (white) is displayed in the first reserved ball display area 701, the reserved ball is changed to the display mode (blue) before the fluctuation indicated by the reserved ball starts, and the fluctuation indicated by the reserved ball starts. Occasionally, an effect of changing the holding ball to the display mode (yellow) may be performed. That is, when the selected look-ahead hold change pattern changes the display mode of the hold ball from the beginning, hold at any timing from the time when the game ball passes through the start opening to the time before the change starts. It may change the display mode of the sphere. The same applies to other look-ahead pending change patterns.

Further, in the normal mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the starting memory number (holding number) of the first special symbol is "4", and "05H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern, 1 With a selection rate of / 100, "look-ahead hold change pattern 405" is selected as the look-ahead hold change pattern. When "look-ahead hold change pattern 405" is selected, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 32, it indicates the hold ball used in the change after 4 times, in a normal display mode. When a holding ball of a certain display mode (white) is displayed in the first holding ball display area 701, the holding ball is changed to the display mode (blue) when the next fluctuation starts, and when the next fluctuation starts. The holding ball is changed to the display mode (yellow), the holding ball is changed to the display mode (green) when the next fluctuation starts, and the holding ball is displayed when the fluctuation indicated by the holding ball starts. An effect that changes to the aspect (red) is performed.

In the look-ahead hold change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, the start storage number (hold number) of the first special symbol is "1", and the fluctuation pattern is as follows. When "09H" is determined, "look-ahead hold change pattern 111" is selected as the look-ahead hold change pattern with a selection rate of 1/100. When the "look-ahead hold change pattern 111" is selected, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 32, the hold ball in the display mode (blue) is held to indicate the hold ball used in the next variation. The ball is displayed in the first reserved ball display area 701, and when the fluctuation indicated by the reserved ball starts, the holding ball is changed to the display mode (rainbow). As described above, the look-ahead hold change pattern of the present embodiment includes not only the look-ahead hold change pattern in which the display mode changes in the order of the jackpot expectation as described above, but also the jackpot expectation changes in a plurality of stages with one change. Includes a look-ahead pending change pattern that changes the display mode so as to.

Further, in the normal mode, when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, the starting memory number (holding number) of the first special symbol is "4", and "09H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern, 1 With a selection rate of / 100, "look-ahead hold change pattern 416" is selected as the look-ahead hold change pattern. When "look-ahead hold change pattern 416" is selected, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 32, it indicates the hold ball used in the change after 4 times, in a normal display mode. When a holding ball of a certain display mode (blue) is displayed in the first holding ball display area 701, the holding ball is changed to the display mode (yellow) when the next fluctuation starts, and when the next fluctuation starts. The holding ball is changed to the display mode (green), the holding ball is changed to the display mode (red) when the next fluctuation starts, and the holding ball is displayed when the fluctuation indicated by the holding ball starts. An effect that changes to a mode (rainbow) is performed.

<The change hold change pattern determination table>
15 and 16 are diagrams showing an example of the change hold change pattern determination table. The change hold change pattern determination table is a table referred to in the hold display mode change effect processing (see FIG. 53 described later) controlled by the sub CPU 71, and the result of the jackpot determination (winning), the pseudo-ream performed in the change. The type of the variable hold change pattern to be determined (the content of the variable hold change effect) is defined according to various parameters such as the number of times (pseudo-ream number), the variation pattern, and the random number range for sub-effect selection. .. The specific control of the change hold change effect using the table will be described later.

The change hold change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 determines whether or not to change the display mode of the hold ball displayed in the change hold ball display area 703 when it is digested as the change. It is used for this purpose, and it is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree by changing the display mode of the holding ball.

In the fluctuation pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, and the number of pseudo-reams (pseudo-reams) performed in the fluctuation is "1", and the fluctuation When "05H" is determined as the pattern and the current display mode of the reserved ball is the display mode (blue), the variable hold change pattern is "corresponding" with a selectivity of 30/100. "Floating hold change pattern 205" is selected. When "the change hold change pattern 205" is selected, when the hold ball of the display mode (blue) is displayed in the change hold ball display area 703 as indicating the hold ball used in the change. At the time of execution of the first pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 1), an effect of changing the holding ball to the display mode (yellow) is performed.

The "look-ahead hold change pattern 205" indicates, for example, a hold ball used in the change, and the hold ball in the display mode (white), which is a normal display mode before the start of the change, is the change hold. When displayed in the sphere display area 703, the reserved sphere is changed to the display mode (blue) at the start of the fluctuation, and the reserved sphere is displayed at the time of executing the first pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 1). The effect of changing to the aspect (yellow) may be performed. That is, the variable hold change pattern may be a hold change pattern that changes the display mode of the hold ball between before the start of the change and at the start of the change. The same applies to the other fluctuation pending change patterns.

For example, in FIG. 15, as the variable hold change pattern when the pseudo-ream number (not shown) is “0”, when the display mode of the hold ball before the start of the change is the display mode (white). , When the fluctuation holding change pattern for changing the display mode of the reserved ball at the start of the fluctuation to the display mode (blue) or the display mode of the reserved ball before the start of the fluctuation is the display mode (blue). It is possible to set the fluctuation hold change pattern or the like that changes the display mode of the hold ball at the start of the change to the display mode (green).

Further, in the normal mode, the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the number of pseudo-reams performed in the fluctuation (pseudo-ream number) is "4", and "05H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern. When the current display mode of the reserved ball is the display mode (white), "the variable hold change pattern 505" is selected as the variable hold change pattern at a selection rate of 10/100. When "the change hold ball change pattern 505" is selected, when the hold ball of the display mode (white) is displayed in the change hold ball display area 703 as indicating the hold ball used in the change. In addition, the reserved ball is changed to the display mode (blue) at the time of executing the first pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 1), and the reserved ball is displayed at the time of executing the second pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 2) (pseudo-ream 2). Change to yellow), change the hold ball to the display mode (green) at the time of execution of the third pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 3), and change the hold ball to the display mode (green) at the time of execution of the fourth pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 4). Is changed to the display mode (red).

In the fluctuation pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, and the number of pseudo-reams (pseudo-ream number) performed in the fluctuation is "1", and the fluctuation. When "09H" is determined as the pattern and the current display mode of the reserved ball is the display mode (green), the variable hold change pattern is "corresponding" with a selectivity of 30/100. The variable hold change pattern 212 ”is selected. When "the change hold ball change pattern 212" is selected, when the hold ball of the display mode (green) is displayed in the change hold ball display area 703 as indicating the hold ball used in the change. In addition, at the time of execution of the first pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 1), an effect of changing the holding ball to the display mode (rainbow) is performed. As described above, in the variable hold change pattern of the present embodiment, not only the variable hold change pattern in which the display mode changes in the order of the jackpot expectation as described above, but also the jackpot expectation changes in a plurality of steps by one change. The variable pending change pattern that changes the display mode so as to be included is included.

Further, in the normal mode, the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, the number of pseudo-reams performed in the fluctuation (the number of pseudo-reams) is "4", and "09H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern. When the current display mode of the reserved ball is the display mode (white), "the variable hold change pattern 510" is selected as the variable hold change pattern with a selection rate of 10/100. When "the change hold ball change pattern 510" is selected, when the hold ball of the display mode (blue) is displayed in the change hold ball display area 703 as indicating the hold ball used in the change. In addition, the reserved ball is changed to the display mode (yellow) at the time of executing the first pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 1), and the reserved ball is displayed at the time of executing the second pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 2). Change to green), change the hold ball to the display mode (red) when the third pseudo-ream is executed (pseudo-ream 3), and change the hold ball to the display mode (red) when the fourth pseudo-ream is executed (pseudo-ream 4). Is performed to change the display mode (rainbow).

<Operation-linked production scenario determination table>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an operation-linked effect scenario determination table. The operation-linked effect scenario determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal mode processing (see FIG. 52 described later) controlled by the sub CPU 71, and is the result of the jackpot determination (win), the fluctuation pattern, and the random number range for sub-effect selection. Information (operation-linked production scenario) for managing the production content in the operation-linked production that is determined according to various parameters such as the above is defined. In addition, in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, and FIG. 21, the lottery value information when the random number range (probability denominator) is 32768 is defined. For example, when the lottery value is 32768, the lottery rate is 32768/32768. That is, it becomes 100%.

In the operation-linked effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, scenarios 1 (success) to scenario 5 (success), which may eventually become successful as the effect content of the operation-linked effect, and final as the effect content of the operation-linked effect. When scenario 6 (failure) to scenario 10 (failure), which are unlikely to be successful (failure), are specified and "08H" or "12H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern, If any of scenario 1 (success) to scenario 5 (success) is determined by lottery and "04H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern, any of scenario 6 (failure) to scenario 10 (failure) The scenario is decided by lottery. The contents of each scenario will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 20.

As shown in FIG. 17, when "08H" or "12H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern, scenario 1 (success) is determined by the lottery rate of 7768/32768, and scenario 2 (success) is determined by the lottery rate of 7000/32768. Success) is determined, and one of scenario 3 (success) to scenario 5 (success) is determined at a lottery rate of 6000/32768. The lottery rate may be different depending on whether "08H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern or "12H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern. For example, when "12H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern (that is, the result of the jackpot determination is a hit) than when "08H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern (that is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss). The lottery rate may be defined so that a specific scenario (for example, scenario 2 (success)) is determined with a higher probability.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, when "04H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern, scenario 6 (failure) is determined by the lottery rate of 7768/32768, and scenario 7 (failure) is determined by the lottery rate of 7000/32768. Is determined, and one of scenario 8 (failure) to scenario 10 (failure) is determined at a lottery rate of 6000/32768.

<Operation-linked production stage transition decision table>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of an operation-linked effect stage transition determination table. The operation-linked effect stage transition determination table is a table referred to in the press operation button operation determination process (see FIGS. 45 and 46 described later) controlled by the sub CPU 71, and includes the current stage, the type of operation-linked effect scenario, and the operation-linked effect scenario. Information (presence or absence of stage shift) for determining whether or not to shift the stage of the effect in the operation-linked effect is defined according to various parameters such as a random number range for sub-effect selection. The specific control of the operation-linked effect using the table will be described later.

In the operation-linked effect stage transition determination table shown in FIG. 18, when the press operation button 9A is operated for each determined operation-linked effect scenario (see FIG. 17), the stage shifts from the current stage to the next stage. It is decided that the lottery value is determined to be performed (stage transition "Yes") and that the stage transition is not performed from the current stage to the next stage when the pressing operation button 9A is operated (stage transition "No"). The lottery value is defined, and whether or not to shift the stage is determined according to which range the sub-effect selection random number range belongs to.

For example, if "scenario 1 (success)" is determined as the operation-linked effect scenario and the current stage is "0" or "1" when the pressing operation button 9A is operated. The lottery rate of 24576/32768 determines the stage transition "Yes", and the lottery rate of 8192/32768 determines the stage transition "No". If the current stage is any of "2" to "5", the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, and the stage transition "No" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768. Will be done. If the current stage is "6", the lottery rate of 14107/32768 determines the stage transition "Yes", and the lottery rate of 18661/32768 determines the stage transition "No". If the current stage is any of "8" to "11", the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 10922/32768, and the stage transition "No" is determined by the lottery rate of 21846/32768. Will be done. If the current stage is "7", it is not decided by lottery whether or not to shift the stage, and when the pressing operation button 9A is operated after the predetermined transition condition described later is satisfied, the pressing operation button 9A is operated. It is now decided to shift the stages. However, in the operation-linked effect stage transition determination table shown in FIG. 18, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated after the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the stage transition "Yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 32768/32768. If the pressing operation button 9A is operated before the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the stage transition "None" is determined at the lottery rate of 32768/32768, and the stage transition "None" is determined. The stage transition "Yes" may be configured so as not to be determined.

Here, the stage "7" in "scenario 1 (success)" is set as a conditional stage transition period. The conditional stage transition period is provided so that when the pressing operation button 9A is operated after a predetermined transition condition is satisfied among the stages in the operation-linked effect scenario, the stage always shifts to the next stage. In the present embodiment, the predetermined transition condition is that the conditional stage transition period has passed. That is, in the present embodiment, for example, when the transition to the stage "7" in "scenario 1 (success)" is performed, the conditional stage transition period (for example, 90 frames of images can be displayed 1.5). Until the lapse of seconds (1500 ms)), it is not determined to shift the stage even if the press operation button 9A is operated, but the press operation button 9A is operated after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed. In some cases, it is always decided to shift the stage. Further, if the pressing operation button 9A is not operated even after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed, it is not decided to shift the stage. In stages "7" and "11" in "Scenario 2 (Success)", "Scenario 4 (Success)", "Scenario 5 (Success)", "Scenario 9 (Failure)", and "Scenario 10 (Failure)" Stages "7" in stages "8", "scenario 6 (failure)" and "scenario 7 (failure)" are also set as conditional stage transition periods. On the other hand, in "Scenario 3 (success)" and "Scenario 8 (failure)", the conditional stage transition period is not set, and the stage shifts when the press operation button 9A is operated in all stages. Whether or not to let it be done is decided by lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation-linked effect is provided with the effect stage set as the conditional stage transition period, so that the predetermined period (conditional stage transition period) in the process of the effect stage transition is set. Since it is possible to create a state in which the stage does not always shift, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player who has been able to smoothly shift the production stage to the production stage, and it is possible to diversify the production. ..

The predetermined transition conditions are not limited to those described above. For example, as a predetermined transition condition, it can be adopted that the pressing operation button 9A is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more in the conditional stage transition period. In this case, after the pressing operation button 9A has been operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, when the pressing operation button 9A is further operated, the process may be immediately shifted to the next stage, or the conditional stage. It may be possible to move to the next stage after the transition period has elapsed. Further, as a predetermined transition condition, Y seconds (for example, 1) is after a lapse of X seconds (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the start of the conditional stage transition period within the conditional stage transition period. It is also possible to adopt that the pressing operation button 9A is operated in the period (seconds) before the elapse. In this case, after the pressing operation button 9A is operated in a specific period, when the pressing operation button 9A is further operated, the process may be immediately shifted to the next stage, or after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed, the next stage may be performed. You may move to the stage of. By doing so, it is possible to intentionally increase the number of operations of the pressed operation button 9A or change the operation timing in the operation-linked effect, and it is possible to diversify the effect.

Further, the conditional stage transition period is not limited to the above-mentioned one and can be appropriately set as long as it is within a predetermined time (operation-linked effect effective time) as the executable time of the operation-linked effect. For example, when the stage "7" is set as the conditional stage transition period, 1.5 seconds (1500 ms) capable of displaying an image for 90 frames is set as the conditional stage transition period, and the stage is set. When "8" is set as the conditional stage transition period, 2 seconds (2000 ms) capable of displaying 120 frames of images is set as the conditional stage transition period, and the stage "11" is a condition. When setting as the additional step transition period, 4 seconds (4000 ms) capable of displaying an image of 240 frames may be set as the conditional step transition period. That is, the later the stage set as the conditional stage transition period, the longer the conditional stage transition period may be. Alternatively, the later the stage set as the conditional stage transition period, the shorter the conditional stage transition period can be. The same applies to the specific period described above. By doing so, the timing of transition from the conditional stage transition period to the next stage can be different depending on which stage is set as the conditional stage transition period, so that the production can be diversified. It will be possible.

Further, the lottery rate for deciding whether or not to shift the stage is not limited to the above. For example, an operation-linked effect scenario in which the lottery rate at which the stage transition “Yes” is determined at a stage other than the conditional stage transition period is 32768/32768 may be specified. Specifically, in "Scenario 1 (success)", stage "7" is defined as a conditional stage transition period, and stage transition "Yes" in stages "1" to "6" and "8" to "11". The lottery rate at which "" is determined is defined as 32768/32768. By doing so, in the stage other than the conditional stage transition period, the transition to the next stage is immediately performed, and in the conditional stage transition period, the transition to the next stage is not performed unless the predetermined transition conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to produce a more sharp effect.

Further, in this case, the same lottery rate may be specified in "Scenario 6 (Failure)" which is paired with "Scenario 1 (Success)". However, in this case, since "scenario 6 (failure)" will eventually result in operation-linked production failure, the predetermined period as the conditional stage transition period is defined in "scenario 1 (success)". (For example, if the conditional stage transition period in "Scenario 1 (success)" is 1.5 seconds, the conditional stage transition period in "Scenario 6 (failure)" is 9 seconds), or Even if the press operation button 9A is operated after the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the conditional stage transition period, the lottery rate at which the stage transition "Yes" is determined without shifting to the next stage (for example, the lottery rate at which the stage transition "Yes" is determined is determined. (0/32768), or the probability of moving to the next stage may be reduced (for example, the lottery rate at which the stage transition "Yes" is determined is 8192/32768). That is, the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied in the conditional stage transition period in "Scenario 6 (success)" is better than the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied in the conditional stage transition period in "Scenario 1 (success)". It may be difficult to move to the next stage. By doing so, for example, when the conditional stage transition period occurs in the stage "7", "scenario 1 (success)" or "scenario 6 (failure)" is determined as the operation-linked production scenario. If you move to the next stage after the predetermined transition conditions are met, it is more likely that "Scenario 1 (success)" has been decided, so the expectation for a big hit is high at the same time. Will be able to be recognized. That is, the jackpot expectation can be changed depending on whether or not the conditional stage transition period is shifted to the next stage. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Example of production content of operation-linked production>
Here, an example of the effect content of the operation-linked effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. 19 and 20 are diagrams showing an example of the effect content for each operation-linked effect scenario. In the following description, a case where "scenario 1 (success)" is determined as an operation-linked effect scenario will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 19, when the current stage is "0", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "Yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 24576/32768, the display area 4A In, character 1 is displayed and moved to the next stage. On the other hand, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift "none" is determined by the lottery rate of 8192/32768, the character 1 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the character 1 is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "0" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "Yes" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "0".

Further, when the current stage is "1", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 24576/32768, the character 1 is added to the display area 4A. Character 2 is displayed and moved to the next stage. On the other hand, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage transition "none" is determined by the lottery rate of 8192/32768, the character 2 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the character 2 is not transferred to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "1" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "Yes" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "1".

Further, when the current stage is "2", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the characters 1 and 2 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 3, the character 3 is moved to the next stage. On the other hand, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift "none" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 3 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the character 3 is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "2" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "Yes" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "2".

Further, when the current stage is "3", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the characters 1 to 3 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying character 4, move to the next stage. On the other hand, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift "none" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 4 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the character 4 is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "3" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "Yes" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "3".

Further, when the current stage is "4", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the characters 1 to 4 in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 5, the character 5 is moved to the next stage. On the other hand, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift "none" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 5 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the character 5 is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "4" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "Yes" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "4".

Further, when the current stage is "5", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the characters 1 to 5 in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 6, the character 6 is moved to the next stage. On the other hand, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift "none" is determined by the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 6 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the character 6 is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "5" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "Yes" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "5".

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, when the current stage is "6", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 14107/32768, the display is displayed. In the area 4A, the character 7 is displayed in addition to the characters 1 to 6, and the next stage is started. On the other hand, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift "none" is determined by the lottery rate of 18661/32768, the character 7 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the character 7 is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "6" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "Yes" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "6".

Further, when the current stage is "7", since it is the conditional stage transition period, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed, the character 1 is displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to ~ 7, character 8 is displayed and moved to the next stage. On the other hand, if the pressing operation button 9A is operated before the elapse of the conditional stage transition period, or if the pressing operation button 9A is not operated even after the elapse of the conditional stage transition period, the display area 4A is displayed. Do not display character 7 and do not move to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "7". In this conditional stage transition period, the pressing operation button 9A is invalidated so that the production content of the operation-linked effect can be changed.

Further, when the current stage is "8", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 10922/32768, the characters 1 to 8 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 9, the character 9 is moved to the next stage. On the other hand, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift "none" is determined by the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 9 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the character 9 is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "8" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "Yes" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "8".

Further, when the current stage is "9", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 10922/32768, the characters 1 to 9 in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 10, the character 10 is moved to the next stage. On the other hand, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift "none" is determined by the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 10 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the character 10 is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "9" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "Yes" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "9".

Further, when the current stage is "10", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 10922/32768, the characters 1 to 10 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 11, the character 11 is moved to the next stage. On the other hand, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage shift "none" is determined by the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 11 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the character 11 is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "10" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "Yes" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "10".

Further, when the current stage is "11", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "Yes" is determined by the lottery rate of 10922/32768, the characters 1 to 11 in the display area 4A. In addition to displaying the character 12, the operation-linked effect is terminated, and the effect is developed into Super Reach C. On the other hand, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage transition "none" is determined by the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 12 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the character 12 is not shifted to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "11" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "Yes" is determined. Further, even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains "11". In "Scenario 6 (Failure)" to "Scenario 10 (Failure)", when the current stage is "11", even if the pressing operation button 9A is operated, the stage transition "Yes" is determined. (See FIG. 18) so that the effect does not develop into Super Reach C (that is, the operation-linked effect fails).

Further, regardless of the current stage of "0" to "11", the operation-linked effect is terminated when the operation-linked effect effective time elapses. Therefore, when the player wants to confirm the final production stage in the operation-linked production, it is necessary to shift the stage as soon as possible within the period obtained by subtracting the conditional stage transition period from the operation-linked production effective time. Become. That is, at a stage other than the conditional stage transition period, the pressing operation button 9A is repeatedly pressed so that the stage transition "Yes" is determined earlier. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the production using the operating means.

<Scenario determination table in RUSH mode>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario determination table in RUSH mode. The scenario determination table in the RUSH mode is a table referred to in the press operation button operation determination process (see FIGS. 45 and 46 described later) controlled by the sub CPU 71, and corresponds to various parameters such as a random number range for sub-effect selection. Therefore, information for determining the order of determining the opponent characters in the "Kakekko Battle Reach" production in the RUSH mode (scenario during the RUSH mode) is specified. The specific control of the "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect using the table will be described later.

In the scenario determination table in RUSH mode shown in FIG. 21, scenarios 1 to 24 in which the order of determining the opponent characters is different are defined as the scenario in RUSH mode, and the lottery value is defined for each of them. One of the scenarios is determined according to which range the random number range for effect selection belongs to.

Here, as shown in FIG. 21, the character 1 is relatively difficult to determine as compared with other opponent characters (for example, scenarios 1 to 12), and all the opponent characters are regarded as victorious characters. The difficulty level is set high. In that sense, character 1 can also be called a special character.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 22 to 41.

[Main processing by main CPU]
22 and 23 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 22, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs the watchdog timer disable setting process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S11.

In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in a power failure detection state. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that it is in the power failure detection state and processing is transferred to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that it is not in the power failure detection state and processing is performed in S13. Move.

In S13, the main CPU 61 performs the sub-control reception reception wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 waits until the sub-control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S14.

In S14, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S15.

In S15, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S30 (see FIG. 23) when it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, and shifts to S16 when it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON. Move the process.

In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S17 when it determines that there is a power failure detection flag, and shifts the process to S30 (see FIG. 23) when it determines that there is no power failure detection flag. ..

In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the damage in the work area and calculating the work damage check value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the process is transferred to S19, and when it is determined that the work damage check value is not a normal value, S30 (see FIG. 23). ).

In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S21.

In S21, the main CPU 61 performs the probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 displays that the jackpot winning probability is in the high probability state in the case of the probability variation game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S22. The display to be notified may be configured to end at the first fluctuation start or fluctuation end after the power is turned on.

In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power failure to the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings of devices around the main CPU 61. When this processing is completed, the processing is transferred to S24, and the processing is returned to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter returned from the stack area.

As shown in FIG. 23, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S31.

In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring the initial value of the random number related to the hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 61 performs the entire work area clearing process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of the initialization of the RAM. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 61 performs the initial value random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number for selecting the effect condition. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number counter value for selecting the effect condition. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S41. In this process, the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value may be updated.

In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63, and if the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process is transferred to S42 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If it is not the above, the process is transferred to S37.

In S42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and a large winning opening for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening to be opened when a big hit occurs. Various types of timers, such as an open time timer and a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of a security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal plate 80 when it is detected that there is an illegal act. Executes the process of updating the timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 sets the hit determination random value and the hit symbol determination random value according to the detection signals from the first start winning opening switch 320 and the second starting winning opening switch 330. Is extracted, the jackpot determination table (not shown) stored in the main ROM 62 is referred to, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) has been won, and the determination result is stored in the main RAM 63. Do. The special symbol control process of S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. 32. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S45.

In S45, the main CPU 61 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to use the lost symbol or the hit symbol based on the hit probability of the normal symbol (see FIG. 8) according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 350, and determines whether to use the lost symbol or the hit symbol. Performs the process of storing the result. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if the non-winning symbol is won, the result of the determination indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 is opened three times in 1.3 seconds, four times in 1.4 seconds, or six times in 1.8 seconds, for example. To do. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the blade member 34 is opened, and when the blade member 34 is in the open state, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 33. The main CPU 61 extracts a normal symbol determination random value and a normal symbol determination random value according to a detection signal from the passing gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random value and the main ROM 62. Based on the ordinary symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won, and the result of this determination, the random value for determining the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62 (illustrated). (Omitted) may be used to determine whether to use a lost symbol or a hit symbol. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S46.

In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends a control signal for driving the LED unit 5 to the main RAM 63 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. Perform the process of memorizing. As a result, the LED unit 5 variablely displays and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 fluctuates and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S47.

In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates data related to the game information signal to be transmitted to the stand computer or the hall computer 100, and performs a process of storing the data in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S48.

In S48, the main CPU 61 performs the symbol hold number data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has the first start port switches 320 and the second, which are detected in the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S91, S92 in FIG. 26) in the timer interrupt process described later. The first is based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350, and the update result of the hold number data stored in the main RAM 63 which is updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A process of storing a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S49.

In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above steps and the like. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal plate 80, an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED, a first grand prize opening shutter 36A, and a second grand prize. It supplies solenoid power for driving a solenoid that opens and closes the mouth shutter 37A and opens and closes the blade member 34. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S50.

In S50, the main CPU 61 performs command control processing related to the winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units. The main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. This timer interrupt process is a process performed according to a clock pulse generated from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 24, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register save process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S61.

In S61, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of increasing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by +1. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) on condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process of S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. 25. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the initial reset circuit 64 to the main CPU 61 A system reset signal is output to. The main CPU 61 enters the system reset state when a system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 61 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, a reach determination counter, and an effect selection counter. If the update timing of the counter value is undefined, the random number counter for hit judgment and the random number counter for hit symbol determination will lack fairness. Therefore, in order to guarantee this, the timing is fixed every 2 ms. I am trying to update with. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 61 performs a switch input process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area or the like has detected a winning. When, for example, the main CPU 61 detects a winning, the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have won is set to "1 (ON)". The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S65.

In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first prize opening 36, the second prize opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40. If there is a prize, the payout request command corresponding to each is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out the prize ball corresponding to the winning area whose bit is "1 (ON)" with the winning of the game ball from the payout device 83, and also sets the set command. Is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command set is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub-control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S67.

In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register reset process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of returning the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this processing is completed, this timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer update process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer update process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 18, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started). In the present embodiment, when the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started) reaches a predetermined condition (3 times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) is executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S71.

In S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for timing various execution waiting times. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S72.

In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0". The residual ball monitoring timer is a ball passage from the first large winning opening 36 to the first large winning opening count switch 360, or a ball passage from the second large winning opening 37 to the second large winning opening count switch 370. It is a timer for measuring the residual sphere monitoring processing time for monitoring the residual spheres remaining in. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", it shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77. , S73. If the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0" and the game ball is detected by the large winning opening count switch when the round game is not in progress, an error may be notified.

In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the residual ball monitoring timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", it shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77. , S75.

In S75, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area 38A is open. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77 when it determines that the specific area 38A is not open, and shifts the process to S76 when it determines that the specific area 38A is open.

In S76, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the specific area closure data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on the control signal based on this data. As a result, the displacement member 39 is driven so as to close the specific region 38A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S77. As described above, in the present embodiment, the value of the residual ball monitoring timer becomes "0" after the second big winning opening 37 finishes the long opening (the section where the opening state is 27.948s) and becomes the closed state. Then, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, so that the specific region 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed after being opened for a time slightly shorter than 29.144s defined as the longest operating time by the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIG.

In S77, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for measuring the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharge balls discharged by winning a prize in the second large winning opening 37. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S80 when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0", and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", it is S78. Move the process to. In the present embodiment, a smaller value (shorter time) is set in the residual ball monitoring timer than in the discharge monitoring timer, but they may be the same or a larger value (longer time).

In S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", it terminates this timer update processing routine, and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". Moves the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is “10”. The large winning opening opening count counter is a counter used to identify the 4th R opening / closing of the second large winning opening 37. Therefore, the value of the large winning opening opening count counter does not count the number of times that the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are actually opened, but is added by 1 for each round. is there. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is not "4", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S82 and determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is "4". If so, the process is transferred to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer update processing routine, and the control state flag indicates processing during opening of the large winning opening. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process is transferred to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second large winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the ejection ball counter. The second large winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the second large winning opening 37 detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370. The discharge ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharge balls of the game ball detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the second large winning opening winning counter and the value of the ejection ball counter are the same. In this process, if the value of the second special winning opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the ejection ball counter, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer update processing routine, and the value of the second winning opening winning counter becomes If it is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process is transferred to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from the detection of the game ball by the second winning opening count switch 370 to the detection by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. Corresponds to time. Therefore, if it is determined in this process that the value of the 2nd big winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the ejection ball counter, the ball is clogged inside the 2nd big winning opening 37 or the 2nd big due to so-called goto action. It is assumed that only the winning opening count switch 370 is detected.

In S83, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the power has not been discharged normally. This discharge error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second large winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being sent repeatedly. When this processing is completed, the timer update processing routine is terminated. The discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the processing of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 26, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs a fraud detection switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S91. If any of the above sensors is in the detected state, an error notification may be performed, and at that time, for example, even if the large winning opening count switch detects the winning of the game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may try to do it.

In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This special symbol-related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input of the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected, and if it is determined that there is an input, the pending number is an upper limit (for example,). It is determined whether or not the number is 4), and if it is determined that the number is the upper limit, this process is terminated. If it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, a process of outputting a detection signal is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 61 performs a prize ball-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330 have been input. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening winning ball counter is performed, and the first starting winning opening switch 320 or the second winning opening switch 320 or the second. When it is determined that the start opening winning opening switch 330 has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the starting opening winning counter corresponding to each is performed. When this processing is completed, this switch input processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol-related switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 27, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs the first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 61 performs the second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 61 performs the first large winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 61 performs the second big winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. When this process is completed, this special symbol-related switch check process routine is terminated.

[1st start port switch check process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 28, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected based on the detection signal from the first starting port switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is "1 (ON)", and determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", and determines whether or not the bit is "1 (ON)". When the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S111, and when the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this first starting port is used. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start storages of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the first start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter, and further. , The reach determination random number value is extracted from the reach determination counter, the effect selection random number value is extracted from the effect selection counter, and the process is performed to store it in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area includes the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the first starting port 32 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number values of are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S115.

In S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S116.

In S116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. This start winning command includes information indicating a random number for determining a hit and information indicating a random number for determining a winning symbol. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that the game ball has won a prize and whether or not the winning lottery result has been won. Will be. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect that continues over a plurality of games when it is determined in the process of S115 that the winning effect is to be produced. This enables a so-called "look-ahead effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory before the variable execution. When this process is completed, the first start port switch check process routine is terminated.

[2nd start port switch check process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 29, in S120, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and determines whether or not the bit is “1 (ON)”, and determines whether or not the bit is “1 (ON)”. If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S121, and if the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this second starting port is used. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start storages of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter, and further. , The reach determination random number value is extracted from the reach determination counter, the effect selection random number value is extracted from the effect selection counter, and the process is performed to store it in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area includes the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the second starting port 33 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random value of is sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is completed, the second start port switch check process routine is terminated.

[1st prize opening switch check process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a first large winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first prize opening switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 30, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the first winning opening 36 is detected based on the detection signal from the first winning opening count switch 360. Perform the processing to be performed. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36 is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S131 and detects the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36. If it is determined that this is not the case, the first large winning opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first large winning opening winning counter. The first large winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 61 sets the first special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first grand prize opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the first grand winning opening 36. Become aware. As a result, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout prize balls) in the RUSH mode can be added and displayed. When this process is completed, the first large winning opening switch check process routine is terminated.

[2nd prize opening switch check process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a second large winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second big winning opening switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 31, in S140, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 37 is detected based on the detection signal from the second winning opening count switch 370. Perform the processing to be performed. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37 is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S141 and detects the winning of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37. If it is determined that the process is not performed, the process is transferred to S143.

In S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second large winning opening winning counter. The second major winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 61 sets the second special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second major winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the second major winning opening 37. Become aware. This also enables, for example, an additional display of the total number of payouts (number of payout prize balls) in the RUSH mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S143.

In S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected based on the detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected, it shifts the process to S144 and determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is not detected. In that case, the process is transferred to S152.

In S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is “4”. The large winning opening opening counter is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is not "4", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152 and determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is "4". If so, the process is transferred to S146.

In S146, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag described later is a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S149, and the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening. ), The process is transferred to S147.

In S147, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag described later is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before restarting the large winning opening or a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. I do. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is "05H" or "06H", it shifts the process to S148, and when it determines that the control state flag is neither "05H" nor "06H". Moves the process to S152.

In S148, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than "0". The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than "0", it shifts the process to S149 and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than "0". The process is transferred to S152. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than "0", it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred, and an error command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 70 to notify the error. You may try to do it.

In S149, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passage flag is "01H". The specific area passage flag is an internal flag whose value is set as "01H" when the V winning of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area pass flag is "01H", it shifts the process to S152, and when it determines that the value of the specific area pass flag is not "01H", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152. , S150.

In S150, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the specific area passage flag. The value "01H" of the specific area passage flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is determined after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S151.

In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passage command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) in the specific area 38A. The specific area passage command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V prize in the specific area 38A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the passage of the game ball into the non-specific area 38B is detected based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S153 and determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is not detected. In that case, the process is transferred to S154.

In S153, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S154.

In S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second large winning opening winning counter is smaller than the value of the ejection ball counter. That is, the game ball is not detected by the second special winning opening count switch 370, and the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. judge. In this process, if the value of the second large winning opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the second large winning opening switch check processing routine and ends the second large winning opening. If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the ejection ball counter, the process is transferred to S155.

In S155, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command is as described above. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S156.

In S156, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second large winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being sent repeatedly. When this process is completed, the second large winning opening switch check process routine is terminated. The discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S156.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in the following step units. In FIG. 32, the numerical values shown on the sides of S161 to S168 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flags in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63 according to the numerical value. As a result, the special symbol game will proceed.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S161.

In S161 to S168, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S161 to S168 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the process in each step, and executes other subroutines. The main CPU 61 also executes a timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

In S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol memory check process. The details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 61 executes the special symbol fluctuation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and when the fluctuation time elapses, sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management to the control state flag. It is set, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 540 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S163 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. The details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a big hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time elapses after the determination. When the main CPU 61 is a big hit, the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management is set in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of S164 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S164.

In S164, the main CPU 61 executes the hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval elapses, the first grand prize read from the main ROM 62 The data for opening the mouth shutter 36A and the second prize-winning mouth shutter 37A and the data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 of FIG. 23, the main CPU 61 receives data and a displacement member 39 for opening the first special winning opening shutter 36A and the second special winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63. Data for opening is read out, and control signals based on these data are supplied to the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the displacement member solenoid 390. As a result, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the first special winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37. The details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 61 executes the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval patterns a to c) has elapsed, The memory is updated so that the number of times the large winning opening opening counter is increased by "1". The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.996s of the opening / closing pattern A) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S166. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for controlling the opening / closing of the displacement member 39. The details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S166.

In S166, the main CPU 61 executes the process during the opening of the large winning opening. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the main CPU 61 has elapsed the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more, and the opening upper limit time has elapsed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value (06H) indicating a winning end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, and a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening when it is not the final round. To the control status flag. The details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S167.

In S167, the main CPU 61 executes the hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval, and when the time corresponding to the hit end interval elapses, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S168.

In S168, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game, the main CPU 61 indicates the end of the process at the end of the special symbol game (for example, the end of one game from the external terminal board 801). (Processing for outputting a game end signal, a big hit signal indicating that a big hit game state is in progress, etc.) is executed, and a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check is set. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. The details of S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. When this process is completed, the special symbol control process routine is terminated.

As described above, by setting the control state flag, the special symbol game is executed. Specifically, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (00H), (01H), (02H), and (07H) when the result of the hit determination is lost in the case where the game is not in the big hit game state. As a result, the processes of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 32 are executed at predetermined timings. Further, in the case where the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit game state, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (00H), (01H), and (02H), so that S161 shown in FIG. , S162, S163 are executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is started. Further, when the main CPU 61 is in the big hit game state, the control state flags are set in the order of (03H), (04H), and (05H) to determine the processes of S164, S166, and S165 shown in FIG. It will be executed at the timing of, and the jackpot game state will be executed. When the end condition of the jackpot game state is satisfied, the processes of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 32 are executed at a predetermined timing by setting (04H), (06H), and (07H) in this order. Then, the jackpot game state will end.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 33, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends this special symbol storage check processing routine.

In S171, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start memory. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start memory, the process is transferred to S173.

In S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 63. Further, the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random value for hit determination is stored) becomes "0" is a predetermined time (for example, 30 s). If it is maintained, set the value that allows execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command stored in this way is supplied as a demo display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. As a result, the demo display is executed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. That is, when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S174. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). The process is transferred to S175.

In S174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S176.

In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S176.

In S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 first displays the data of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When the special symbol that shifts (stores) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and is displayed in a variable manner is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data from the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 61 executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) to be jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game status flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select the judgment table. That is, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the game status flag is not a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment table for the non-probability variable game state with few is referred to. In this way, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probability change game state, that is, when the game state is the probability change game state as a special game state in which it is easy to shift to the specific game state (big hit game state), the jackpot game state is set. The probability of transition is higher than that of the probabilistic gaming state as the special gaming state, as compared to the non-probability changing gaming state as the non-special gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the specific gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the special gaming state may be a probabilistic / short-time gaming state (for example, the 1st to 20th times in the RUSH mode), or a probable-changing / non-short-time gaming state (for example, a special mode). The special gaming state may be a non-probability / non-time-saving game state (for example, a normal mode), or a non-probability / time-saving game state (for example, the 21st to 100th times in the RUSH mode).

Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and is for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the random number value and the selected jackpot judgment table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU 61 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to set the jackpot game state advantageous to the player.

The jackpot probability due to winning the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning the second starting port 33. The jackpot probability due to winning the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning the second starting port 33.

In this way, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a jackpot symbol when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot win, and determining a lost symbol when the result is a loss. The details of S179 will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S180.

In S180, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects the variation pattern determination table based on the game state (mode), the result of the jackpot determination (win), and the reach determination random number value. Then, the main CPU 61 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the effect selection random value and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table, and stores the fluctuation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. The various parameters used in determining the fluctuation pattern are acquired when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33 is detected (S113 in FIG. 28 or S123 in FIG. 29). (See), it is also possible to configure the variation pattern to be determined when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33 is detected.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is subjected to variable display in the variable pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a fluctuation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes the process of clearing the storage area used for the variation display this time. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S182.

Then, in S182, the main CPU 61 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display this time. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 34, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to S191. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S198.

In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the fluctuation state number of the jackpot determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S192 when the variation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the main CPU 61, when the fluctuation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is, that is, the value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process is transferred to S194.

In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shows the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol distribution of FIG. 8) based on the hit symbol determination random value and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. A process for determining (a symbol corresponding to any of jackpots 1 to 6) is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 fluctuates the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S196.

In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shows the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol distribution of FIG. 8) based on the hit symbol determination random value and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. The process of determining the symbols corresponding to the jackpots 6 to 9) is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S196.

In S196, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the jackpot symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S197.

In S197, the main CPU 61 performs data set processing related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this process, the main CPU 61 has data related to the number of times the first special winning opening 36 and the second special winning opening 37 are opened, that is, the jackpot 1 to 6 by the first special symbol, or the second special symbol. The process of setting the data corresponding to the jackpots 6 to 9 in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

On the other hand, in S198, when the main CPU 61 determines in S190 that it is not a big hit, that is, it is lost, it performs a data set of lost symbols and a command set of lost symbols. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command of the lost symbol from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the loss stop display mode. When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 35, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) indicates the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S211. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) does not indicate the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine.

In S211 the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S212. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

In S212, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. When this processing is completed, the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 36, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process is transferred to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S223. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S224.

In S223, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a non-probability change / non-time saving game state in the game state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S234.

In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". The time saving number counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (number of symbol fluctuations) in the time saving game state. When the value of the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 61 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". When the value of the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S227. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228.

In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a time saving end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a time-saving end command indicating the end of the time-saving game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the time saving game state. Become. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S232.

In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". The probability variation count counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation count) in the probability variation game state. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S229.

In S229, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S230.

In S230, the main CPU 61 again determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S231. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233.

In S231, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a probability change end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a probability change end command indicating the end of the probability change game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the probability change end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the probability change game state. Become. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S232.

In S232, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, in the probabilistic / short-time game state (03H), the main CPU 61 sets a value (01H) indicating the non-probable change / short-time game state in the game state flag when the probable change / short-time game state ends, and the probable change / non-time-saving game. In the state (02H), when the probabilistic game state ends, a value (00H) indicating a non-probability change / non-time saving game state is set in the game state flag, and in the non-probability change / time saving game state (01H), the time saving game state is set. When is completed, a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a non-probability change / non-time saving game state in the game state flag is executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S233.

In S233, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as a control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S235. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is "big hit 1" of the first special symbol and "big hit 6" of the second special symbol, 9996 ms is set as the hit start interval time, and other jackpot symbols. In the case of, 9996 ms is set as the hit start interval time when the hit starts from the non-time saving game state, and 3996 ms is set as the hit start interval time when the hit starts from the time saving game state. To.

In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the start of the big hit game state. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit game state and a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern in the big hit game state based on the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S236.

In S236, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S237.

In S237, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

[Hit start interval management process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 37, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process is transferred to S241. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S242. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and transfers the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the large winning opening opening number counter, and shifts the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening opening / closing pattern according to the type of the big hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined in S244. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S247.

In S247, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S248.

In S248, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S249.

In S249, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set to 27.996s when the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the large winning opening opening number counter, for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is "big hit 1". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S250.

In S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37. The variable stored in this way drives the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37. Become. When this process is completed, the hit start interval management process routine is terminated.

[Waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. This waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 38, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the process is transferred to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening.

In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S262. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening.

In S262, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S263.

In S263, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a large winning opening opening display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S265.

In S265, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S266.

In S266, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S267.

In S267, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S268.

In S268, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the waiting time management process routine before reopening the large winning opening is terminated.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a process during opening of the large winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. This process during opening of the winning opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 39, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, the processing is transferred to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during opening of the large winning opening.

In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "8" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "8" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S272. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is not "8" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274.

In S272, the main CPU 61 executes the big winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the jackpot type and the current round, and shifts the process to S273.

In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S274. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during the opening of the large winning opening.

In S274, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the big winning opening. The variable stored in this way closes the first winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the residual ball monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as a predetermined value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed large winning opening is the second large winning opening 37. When the main CPU 61 determines that the closed large winning opening is the second large winning opening 37, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S277. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the closed large winning opening is not the second large winning opening 37, that is, the first large winning opening 36, the processing is transferred to S278.

In S277, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the discharge monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as a predetermined value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S278.

In S278, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds), and the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. Is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened. Here, the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is 12 times (12R). When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S282. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is not equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S279.

In S279, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63 based on the hit pattern and the number of rounds. That is, the time corresponding to any of the interval patterns a to c is set based on the hit pattern and the current number of rounds (see FIG. 11). The interval display time between rounds may be set to a time different from the time corresponding to the interval patterns a to c. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S280.

In S280, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S281.

In S281, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process routine during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in S282, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S283. In the present embodiment, when the hit ends from the non-time saving game state, the jackpot symbols are "big hit 1" to "big hit 4" of the first special symbol and "big hit 6" of the second special symbol. ~ If it is "big hit 9", 9996 ms is set as the hit end interval display time, and if the big hit symbol is "big hit 5" to "big hit 7" of the first special symbol, 6000 ms is set as the hit end interval display time. In the case of the end of the hit from the non-time saving game state, 3996 ms is set as the hit end interval display time regardless of the big hit symbol.

In S283, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S284.

In S284, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit game state. When this process is completed, the process routine during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

[Hit end interval management process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in the following step units.

In S290, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process is transferred to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process is transferred to S298.

In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S292. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S298.

In S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 is "01H". If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is not "01H", the process is transferred to S295.

In S294, the main CPU 61 sets the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "02H", sets the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63 to "20", and sets the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 to "00H". Perform the processing. The game state flag "02H" indicates a probabilistic game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is at the end of the hit patterns 5 to 7, that is, at the end of the big hit gaming state based on the "big hit 5" to "big hit 7" of the first special symbol. Do. If it is determined that the hit patterns 5 to 7 are finished, the process is transferred to S296. If it is determined that it is not the end of the hit patterns 5 to 7, the process is transferred to S297.

In S296, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the hit is in the normal game state, that is, at the end of the big hit game state shifted from the non-probability change / non-time saving game state. If it is determined that the hit is in the normal gaming state, the process is transferred to S298. If it is determined that the hit is not in the normal gaming state, the process is transferred to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 61 sets the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "01H" and sets the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 63 to "100". The game state flag "01H" indicates a time-saving game state. When "02H" (00000010B) is set as the game state flag and "01H" (00000001B) is set as the game state flag, the game state flag is "03H" indicating the probability change / time saving game state. "(00000011B). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S298.

In S298, the main CPU 61 sets the game state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The game state command is a command including information indicating the type of the completed hit game state in addition to the information indicating the game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state and the remaining number of times as the time reduction number, and is the main control circuit 60. By being supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 70 comes to recognize the gaming state and the like after the end of the big hit.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 41, in S300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process is transferred to S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol game end processing routine.

In S301, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol game end processing according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the jackpot type and the current round, and transfers the processing to S302. In this special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 executes processing for outputting one game end signal and a jackpot signal from the external terminal plate 80 to the hall computer 100.

In S302, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the special symbol game end process routine is terminated.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 42 to 55. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 42, in S310, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing in response to a power-on. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S311.

In S311 the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating a random number value (a random number counter value for determining an effect, a random number counter value for determining a stop symbol, etc.) stored in the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S312.

In S312, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. The details of this process will be described later, but the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S313. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48.

In S313, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for displaying in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. The display control circuit 76 including the VDP (Video Display Processor) outputs various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71. It is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S314.

In S314, the sub CPU 71 performs voice control processing for controlling the sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the voice control circuit 77. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S315.

In S315, the sub CPU 71 executes a lamp control process for controlling light emission (lighting / blinking) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S316.

In S316, the sub CPU 71 performs the movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S311, and thereafter, the processes of S311 to S316 are repeated.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the command reception interrupt process or the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 43, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 44.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 43, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S321.

In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIGS. 47 and 48. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S320 to each register. When this processing is completed, the command reception interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 44, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S331.

In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating (adding / subtracting) the value of the timer set for the effect control. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S332.

In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. The details of this process will be described later, but the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting the presence / absence of an operation of the push operation button 9A and the jog dial 9B. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S333. The pressing operation button operation determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

In S333, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S330 to each register. When this processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Press operation button operation judgment process]
45 and 46 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 45, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation interlocking effect is being performed. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation-linked continuous firing is being executed based on the determination of "04H", "08H", or "12H" as the fluctuation pattern. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation interlocking effect is in progress, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S341. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation interlocking effect is not in progress, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S359 (see FIG. 46).

In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the conditional stage transition period is in progress. As described above, the conditional stage transition period does not shift to the next stage even if the pressing operation button 9A is performed during the conditional stage transition period, but the conditional stage transition period has elapsed. When a pressing operation to the pressing operation button 9A is performed later, it is a period provided so that the stage always shifts to the next stage (see FIGS. 18 to 20). In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the conditional stage transition period is in progress, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S342. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the conditional stage transition period is not in progress, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S344.

In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation interlocking effect effective time has elapsed. Here, the operation-linked effect effective time is a predetermined time as a time during which the operation-linked effect can be performed within the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern, and can be set to, for example, "28000 ms". In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation interlocking effect effective time has elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S356. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation interlocking effect effective time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S343.

In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of invalidating the pressing operation button. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of invalidating the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A. In this process, the detection by the pressing operation button SW90A may be invalidated, or the number of times the pressing operation button is operated may not be stored in the work RAM 73. Further, in this process, instead of invalidating the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A, a process of setting the lottery rate at which the step transition "Yes" is determined as 0/32768 may be performed. That is, the lottery rate may be set so that the step transition "Yes" is not determined when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated.

In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the conditional stage transition period has ended. That is, the sub CPU 71 is a stage in which the current stage is set as the conditional stage transition period in the determined operation-linked effect scenario, and the period set as the conditional stage transition period (for example, 1.5 seconds). ) Has passed or not. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the conditional stage transition period has ended, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S345. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the conditional stage transition period has not ended, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S350. When the sub CPU 71 determines in this process that the conditional stage transition period has ended, the sub CPU 71 may perform the processes of S348 and S349 without performing the process of S347 described later. That is, when the conditional stage transition period ends, the sub CPU 71 may always shift to the next stage if there is a next stage.

In S345, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of activating the pressing operation button. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of enabling the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A. In this process, instead of enabling the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A, a process of setting the lottery rate at which the step transition "Yes" is determined as 32768/32768 may be performed. That is, the lottery rate may be set so that the step transition "Yes" is always determined when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S346. When the conditional stage transition period ends, it is determined that the conditional stage transition period has ended again in the process of S344 after the pressing operation to the pressing operation button 9A is enabled once in this process. In that case, the process may be transferred to S346 without performing this process again.

In S346, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation interlocking effect effective time has elapsed. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation interlocking effect effective time has elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S356. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation interlocking effect effective time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S347.

In S347, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an operation of the pressing operation button. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pressing operation button 9A has been pressed. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is an operation of the pressing operation button, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S348. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no operation of the pressing operation button, the sub CPU 71 ends the pressing operation button operation determination processing routine. In this process, the sub CPU 71 may shift the process to S355 when it is determined that there is no operation of the pressing operation button. That is, if the pressing operation button 9A is not operated after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed, the operation interlocking effect may be terminated.

In S348, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a next stage. In the present embodiment, since the stages in the operation-linked effect are set to 0 to 11 stages (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the current stage is the 11th stage in this process. Performs the process of determining. When the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a next stage, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S349. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no next stage, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S376 (see FIG. 46).

In S349, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of shifting the stage of the operation interlocking effect to the next stage. For example, if "scenario 1 (success)" is determined as the operation-linked effect scenario and it is the 7th stage as the conditional stage transition period, the sub CPU 71 shifts to the 8th stage of the operation-linked effect. Perform the process of causing. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated.

In S350, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation interlocking effect effective time has elapsed. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation interlocking effect effective time has elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S356. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation interlocking effect effective time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S351.

In S351, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an operation of the pressing operation button. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pressing operation button 9A has been pressed. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is an operation of the pressing operation button, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S352. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no operation of the pressing operation button, the sub CPU 71 ends the pressing operation button operation determination processing routine.

In S352, the sub CPU 71 refers to the operation-linked effect stage transition determination table shown in FIG. 18 and performs a process of determining whether or not to shift from the current stage to the next stage. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S353.

In S353, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the determination result in the process of S352 has a stage shift (that is, a process of shifting to the next stage). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a step shift (that is, the step shift “yes” is determined), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S354. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no stage transition (that is, the stage transition "none" is determined), the sub CPU 71 ends this press operation button operation determination processing routine.

In S354, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a next stage. As described above, in this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the current stage is the 11th stage. When the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a next stage, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S355. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no next stage, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S376 (see FIG. 46).

In S355, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of shifting the stage of the operation interlocking effect to the next stage. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated.

In S356, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is an operation-linked effect success. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is "08H" or "12H" (see FIG. 12). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation interlocking effect is successful, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S357. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the fluctuation pattern is not successful in the operation interlocking effect, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S358.

In S357, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data of "operation interlocking effect failure-> reverse" and performs a process of shifting to super reach C. Even if the fluctuation pattern is the operation-linked production success, if the operation-linked production effective time elapses before the transition to the final production stage, the operation-linked production failure → reversal is used for the operation-linked production. Although it will be a failure as a production, the production of the fluctuation is production data for performing an production indicating that it will develop into Super Reach C. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated.

In S358, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the "operation interlocking effect failure" effect data. The "operation-linked effect failure" effect data is an effect for performing an effect indicating that the operation-linked effect fails when the fluctuation pattern is an operation-linked effect failure and the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed. It is data. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 46, in S359, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the transition to the RUSH mode is in progress. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the time-saving game state is started after the end of the big hit game state. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it is time to shift to the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S360. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not the time to shift to the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S369.

In S360, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of displaying the takeover selection operation screen of the winning character history. Details of this takeover selection operation screen will be described later with reference to FIG. 59. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S361. After the takeover selection operation screen is displayed once in this process, if it is determined again in the process of S359 that it is time to shift to the RUSH mode, the process should be transferred to S361 without performing this process again. It may be.

In S361, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a takeover selection operation has been performed by the player. For example, the sub CPU 71 is selected to take over the winning character by the rotation operation of the jog dial 9B, and performs a process of determining whether or not that is determined by the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover selection operation has been performed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S366. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover selection operation has not been performed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S362.

In S362, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the takeover selection operation valid time has elapsed. Here, the takeover selection operation effective time is a predetermined time as the time during which the takeover selection operation can be performed, and can be set to, for example, "10000 ms". The takeover selection operation may be enabled at the hit end interval display time. In this case, any time equal to or less than the hit end interval display time may be used as the takeover selection operation valid time. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover selection operation valid time has elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S363. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover selection operation valid time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 71 ends the pressing operation button operation determination processing routine.

In S363, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing the winning character history. Here, in the present embodiment, when "Kakekko Battle Reach Hit" or "Special Character Battle Reach Hit" is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the RUSH mode and the game shifts to the big hit game state, the battle that appears in the battle reach The character is stored in the work RAM 73 as a winning character history. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing (initializing) the winning character history to 0 based on the fact that the player has not performed the takeover selection operation. As a result, for example, the player can newly accumulate his / her own winning character history in the RUSH mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S364.

In S364, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing the acquired music history. Here, in the present embodiment, when the battle character appearing in the above-mentioned battle reach is stored in the work RAM 73 as the winning character history, the player can newly select the music corresponding to the battle character. , The selectable music is stored in the work RAM 73 as the acquired music history. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing (initializing) the acquired music history to 0 based on the fact that the player has not performed the takeover selection operation. As a result, for example, the player can newly accumulate the acquired music history in the RUSH mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S365.

In S365, the sub CPU 71 refers to the scenario determination table in the RUSH mode shown in FIG. 21 and performs a process of determining the scenario in the RUSH mode. That is, in the present embodiment, if the winning character history (acquired music history) is not inherited without performing the takeover selection operation, the scenario in RUSH mode (competition character determination order) is not inherited in conjunction with it. , The scenario during RUSH mode (competition character determination order) is newly determined. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated.

In S366, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the winning character history. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning (taking over) the winning character history based on the takeover selection operation performed by the player. Thereby, for example, the player can take over the winning character history of his / her own or another player accumulated in the previous RUSH mode in the current RUSH mode and play the game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S367.

In S367, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the acquired music history. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning (taking over) the acquired music history based on the takeover selection operation performed by the player. Thereby, for example, the player can take over the acquired music history of his / her own or another player accumulated in the previous RUSH mode in the current RUSH mode and play the game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S368.

In S368, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the previous RUSH mode scenario. That is, in the present embodiment, when the takeover selection operation is performed and the winning character history (acquired music history) is taken over, the scenario in RUSH mode (competition character determination order) is also taken over in conjunction with it. It is composed of. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated.

In S369, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the start of hitting in the RUSH mode. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination result is a hit in the time-saving gaming state and the jackpot gaming state is started based on the result of the jackpot determination. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is the start of hitting in the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S370. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not the start of hitting in the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S377.

In S370, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an acquired song. That is, the sub CPU 71 refers to the acquired music history and performs a process of determining whether or not a music other than the default music (the music defined as the default) can be selected. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is an acquired song, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S371. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no acquired music, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S374.

In S371, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of displaying the music selection operation screen of the acquired music. The details of this music selection operation screen will be described later with reference to FIG. 60. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S372. If it is determined that there is an acquired song in the process of S370 again after the music selection operation screen is displayed once in this process, the process is transferred to S372 without performing this process again. May be good.

In S372, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a music selection operation has been performed by the player. For example, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a song is selected by the rotation operation of the jog dial 9B and the song is determined by the push operation of the push operation button 9A. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the music selection operation has been performed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S375. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the music selection operation has not been performed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S373.

In S373, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the music selection operation valid time has elapsed. Here, the effective time for the music selection operation is a predetermined time as the time during which the music selection operation can be performed, and can be set to, for example, "10000 ms". It should be noted that the music selection operation may be enabled at the hit start interval time. In this case, any time equal to or less than the hit start interval time may be used as the music selection operation effective time. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the music selection operation valid time has elapsed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S374. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the music selection operation valid time has not elapsed, the sub CPU 71 ends the pressing operation button operation determination processing routine.

In S374, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a default song. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated.

In S375, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the selected music. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated.

In S376, the sub CPU 71 sets the "operation interlocking effect success" effect data and performs a process of shifting to the super reach C. In the "operation-linked effect success" effect data, the fluctuation pattern is the case where the operation-linked effect is successful, the final stage (for example, the 11th stage) is a stage other than the conditional stage transition period, and the pressed operation button 9A is pressed. When the operation is performed and it is determined that there is a stage transition, or when the final stage (for example, the 11th stage) is the conditional stage transition period and the pressing operation button 9A is operated after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed, the pressing operation button 9A is operated. This is production data for performing an effect indicating that the operation-linked effect is successful and that the variation is developed into Super Reach C. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated.

In S377, the sub CPU 71 executes other pressing operation button operation determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 is linked to the pressing operation, for example, when a process corresponding to a login / logout operation for authenticating the player or an effect linked to a pressing operation to another pressing operation button is performed. Then, processing is performed to change the content of the production. When this process is completed, the press operation button operation determination process routine is terminated.

[Command analysis processing]
47 and 48 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 47, in S390, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S391. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends this command analysis processing routine.

In S391, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command and performs processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the data of the received command is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S392.

In S392, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S393. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S394.

In S393, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. This effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

As described above, the effect pattern may be determined based on the received variation pattern designation command or based on the received start winning command. In addition, each information included in these commands may be integrated.

In S394, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S395. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S396.

In S395, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

The decorative symbols to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers "1" to "7", and the number of these decorative symbols (numbers) is a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits)). )) Are aligned with the same decorative pattern (number) (in the case of a specific display mode), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. In addition, the decorative symbols corresponding to the loss are different from these, but among them, a specific number (for example, two) is stopped and displayed (reach) with the same decorative symbol (number), and the rest (for example, 1). Those with different decorative patterns (numbers) that are stopped and displayed are called reach loss eyes. However, even if it is a loose eye, even if a specific loose eye suggesting a specific meaning (for example, "753" meaning 753) is stopped and displayed, the game may shift to the jackpot game state. ..

In S396, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S397. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S398.

In S397, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S398, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S399. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S401.

In S399, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the content of the effect to be performed in the big hit game state based on the type of the big hit and the effect mode included in the hit start display command received from the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S400.

In S400, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit start process. The hit start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S401, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening winning command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the large winning opening winning command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S402. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the large winning opening winning command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S403.

In S402, the sub CPU 71 executes the prize ball counter addition process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 is in the jackpot gaming state (or in the case of the RUSH mode) according to the number of game balls that have won the prizes in the prize openings (first prize opening 36 and second prize opening 37). The number of prize balls in all the jackpot game states shifted to the RUSH mode) is counted, and the counted number of prize balls is displayed. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S403, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a specific area passing command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S404. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S405.

In S404, the sub CPU 71 executes the V winning process. This V winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S405, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the inter-round display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S407.

In S406, the sub CPU 71 executes the inter-round effect processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process such as setting effect data according to the interval display time between rounds, for example. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S407, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S408. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub CPU 71 has not received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, the process shifts to S409 (see FIG. 48).

In S408, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the round. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for displaying the remaining possible winning numbers and the opening time of the large winning opening in the round. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 48, in S409, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S411.

In S410, the sub CPU 71 executes the hit end effect process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the content of the effect to be performed at the end of the big hit game state based on the type of the big hit included in the hit end display command received from the main CPU 61. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S411, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the game state command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S413.

In S412, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect mode change process. In this process, if the received game state command is a command indicating the probability change / time saving game state, the sub CPU 71 is a command indicating the non-probability change / time saving game state by setting the value of the effect mode flag to "03H". If there is, the value of the effect mode flag is set to "01H", and the RUSH mode is set as the effect mode. Further, if the received game state command is a command indicating a probability change / non-time saving game state, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the effect mode flag to "02H" and sets a special mode as the effect mode. Further, if the received game state command is a command indicating a non-probability change / non-time saving game state, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the effect mode flag to "00H" and sets the normal mode as the effect mode. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S413, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the time saving end command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S415.

In S414, the sub CPU 71 executes the time saving mode end processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 updates the value of the effect mode flag from "01H" to "00H", and updates the effect mode from the RUSH mode to the normal mode. Further, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting a special effect content determination table (not shown) that makes it easy to select an effect pattern having a relatively high expectation in a predetermined number of games after the end of the time saving mode. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S415, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the probability change end command has been received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability change end command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the probability change end command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S417.

In S416, the sub CPU 71 executes the ST mode termination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 updates the value of the effect mode flag from "02H" to "00H", and updates the effect mode from the special mode to the normal mode. When the value of the effect mode flag is updated from "03H" to "01H", the effect mode is not updated. Further, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting a special effect content determination table (not shown) that makes it easy to select an effect pattern with a relatively high expectation in a predetermined number of games after the end of the special mode. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S417, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the discharge error command is received as the command read in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S419.

In S418, the sub CPU 71 executes the discharge error notification process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for notifying the occurrence of an error in the second special winning opening 37. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S419, the sub CPU 71 also executes processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

[Production pattern determination process]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an effect pattern as an effect content, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 49, in S430, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is “01H” or “03H”. The effect mode flag is an internal flag indicating the type of effect mode. In the present embodiment, the effect mode flag has a value corresponding to the normal mode of "00H", a value corresponding to the RUSH mode as a non-probability change / time saving game state of "01H", and a value corresponding to the special mode of "02H". , The value corresponding to the RUSH mode as the probability change / time saving game state is "03H". It is possible to make the background image and the effect content different according to the value of such an effect mode flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect mode is the RUSH mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is "01H" or "03H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S431. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "01H" or "03H", the process is transferred to S433.

In S431, the sub CPU 71 executes the process during the RUSH mode. The processing during the RUSH mode will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S432.

In S432, the sub CPU 71 executes the item effect processing in the RUSH mode. The item effect processing in the RUSH mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S436.

In S433, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "02H". That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the effect mode is a special mode. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the process is transferred to S434. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the process is transferred to S435.

In S434, the sub CPU 71 executes the processing during the special mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a special mode intermediate sub-effect content determination table (not shown), and the result of the jackpot determination (win), the type of the variation pattern specification command, and the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value). The process of determining the effect pattern is performed based on the above. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S436. In this special mode processing, the same processing as the normal mode processing described later may be performed.

In S435, the sub CPU 71 executes the process during the normal mode. This processing during the normal mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 52. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S436.

In S436, the sub CPU 71 executes the hold display mode change effect processing. The hold display mode change effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 53. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S437.

In S437, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting the effect data according to the type of the determined effect pattern. When this process is completed, the effect pattern determination process routine is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern designation command is received, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the hold display mode change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the winning effect determination process of S115 of the first start port switch check process shown in FIG. 28 or S125 of the second start port switch check process shown in FIG. 29, the main CPU 61 performs "look-ahead effect". When is determined, the hold display mode change effect may be executed. That is, the main CPU 61 may control whether or not to execute the hold display mode change effect. In this case, the variation pattern specification command or the start winning command may include information regarding whether or not the "look-ahead effect" is possible by the main CPU 61, or the variation pattern specification command or the start winning command received by the sub CPU 71. Information regarding the propriety of the "look-ahead effect" included in the above may be retained, and the content of the effect of the hold display mode change effect may be determined with reference to the retained information.

Further, the effect content of the hold display mode change effect (for example, the look-ahead hold change pattern shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, and the change hold change pattern shown in FIGS. 15 and 16) is determined on the main CPU 61 side. May be good. In this case, a variation pattern is determined for each effect content of the hold display mode change effect, and the sub CPU 71 performs the hold display mode change effect based on the content of the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern or the start winning command. When a specific variation pattern is selected, the effect content of the hold display mode change effect is separately determined, and a variation pattern specification command including information on the determined effect content, or a start prize is awarded. By transmitting the command, the sub CPU 71 may perform the hold display mode change effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute the hold display mode change effect, and the main CPU 61 determines the effect content of the hold display mode change effect. The sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the hold display mode change effect, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the hold display mode change effect, and the hold display mode. Any aspect of determining the effect content of the change effect shall be included.

Further, regardless of whether the decision-making body is the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71, whether or not to execute the hold display mode change effect and the effect content of the hold display mode change effect when the hold display mode change effect is executed. And may be decided by different lottery, or may be decided at the same time by a batch lottery. That is, whether or not to execute the hold display mode change effect and the effect content of the hold display mode change effect when executing the hold display mode change effect may be determined by a plurality of processes. It may be decided.

[Processing during RUSH mode]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a process in RUSH mode executed by the sub CPU 71. This RUSH mode processing is a process for determining the effect content in the RUSH mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 50, in S440, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of (adding) updating the value of the RUSH mode management counter. The RUSH mode management counter is a counter for counting the number of games played in the RUSH mode, that is, the time-saving game state. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the RUSH mode management counter with one fluctuation. .. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to S441.

In S441, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 88 or more. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a transformation effect section in the RUSH mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 88 or more, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S442. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is not 88 or more (that is, it is the battle effect section of the RUSH mode), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S443.

In S442, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data according to the fluctuation pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for RUSH mode (not shown), and the result of the jackpot determination (win), the type of the variation pattern specification command, and the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value). The process of determining the effect pattern is performed based on the above. When this processing is completed, the processing routine in RUSH mode is terminated.

In S443, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not "14H" or "17H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is to produce a "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "14H" or "17H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S444. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "14H" or "17H" has not been determined as the fluctuation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S451.

In S444, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not all the opponent characters have been won. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the history of winning all the opponent characters of the characters 1 to 12 is stored as the history of the won characters. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that all the opponent characters have been won, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S445. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the opponent characters have not been won, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S446.

In S445, the sub CPU 71 determines the opponent character by lottery, and performs a process of setting the effect data according to the determined opponent character and the fluctuation pattern. In this process, for example, when the opponent character determined by lottery is character 1, if the fluctuation pattern is "14H", the character 1 and the hero character compete with each other and the hero character is defeated. Set the production data corresponding to "Battle Reach Loss", and if the fluctuation pattern is "17H", set the production data corresponding to "Kakekko Battle Reach Hit" in which character 1 and the main character compete and the main character wins. Perform processing. When this processing is completed, the processing routine in RUSH mode is terminated.

In the process of S444, the sub CPU 71 determines that all the opponent characters have been won, and when the fluctuation pattern is "17H", the final stage production (ending) of the series of stories. All the opponent characters are set by setting the production data for performing the production at the time of introduction of the production), and setting the production data for performing the ending production in the hit production pattern determination process (see S399 in FIG. 47). May be given the privilege of being victorious. In addition, when the effect at the time of introduction of the ending effect and the ending effect are performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the winning character history is cleared (initialized) to 0 again, and the winning character history is newly added. It may be possible to accumulate. However, in this case, the acquired music history is not cleared (initialized) to 0, and all the music may remain selectable. Further, when the sub CPU 71 determines in the process of S444 that all the opponent characters have been won, the process of S445 is performed as it is, and in the hit effect pattern determination process (see S399 of FIG. 47), When the production data for performing the ending effect is set and this ending effect is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) (that is, when the jackpot game state is further continued in the RUSH mode), the winning character is again won. The history may be cleared to 0 (initialization).

In S446, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not to select an opponent character according to the determination order of the determined scenario. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines, for example, to select the opponent character according to the decision order of the scenario determined with the probability of 80/100, regardless of the decision order of the scenario determined with the probability of 20/100. It is decided to select one opponent character by lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S447.

In S447, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining the opponent character by the determination order of the determined scenario or the lottery according to the determination result of S446. In this process, for example, when scenario 1 is determined as a scenario during RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 may select an opponent character according to the determined order of the determined scenario. If the character 2 has not been won, the character 2 whose opponent character determination order is "1" is determined as the opponent character. On the other hand, if it is decided to select one opponent character by lottery regardless of the determined order of the determined scenarios, one opponent character is determined by lottery from characters 1 to 12. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S448.

In S448, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not "14H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern and the winning character is determined as the opponent character. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "14H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern and the winning character is determined as the opponent character, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S449. On the other hand, if it is determined that "14H" has not been determined as the fluctuation pattern, or the winning character has not been determined as the opponent character, the process is transferred to S450.

In S449, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing the opponent character in the order of determining the opponent character in the determined RUSH mode in-scenario. In the present embodiment, in the "Kakekko Battle Reach" production, when a winning character appears as an opponent character, it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination is a hit in principle. Therefore, if the result of the jackpot determination is not a hit and the winning character is determined as the fighting character, the sub CPU 71 changes the fighting character to another non-winning character in this process. ing. Specifically, for example, when scenario 1 is determined as a scenario during RUSH mode and the opponent character 2 whose opponent character determination order is "1" has already been won, the opponent character determined in S447 is character 2. If so, the opponent character is changed to the character 11 whose battle character determination order is "2". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S450.

When the opponent character is changed in the process of S449, the sub CPU 71 has not won among the characters whose opponent character determination order value in the determined RUSH mode scenario is lower (higher rank). The character is changed as an opponent character (that is, starting from the opponent character determination order "1", the characters that have not been won are sequentially searched according to the opponent character determination order in the scenario in RUSH mode determined from there. , I try to change the opponent character according to the search result), but it is not limited to this. For example, the battle character may be changed by sequentially searching for characters that have not been won, starting from the battle character determination order corresponding to the character determined as the battle character before the change. Further, for example, the search order is determined in advance for characters 1 to 12 without considering the battle character determination order, and the characters that have not been won are sequentially searched according to this search order to change the battle character. May be good. In this case, for example, the search order may be determined so that "character 12" is the starting point and "character 1" is the ending point. It is also possible to sequentially search for characters that have not been won from any other starting point and change the opponent character.

In S450, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the effect data according to the determined opponent character and the fluctuation pattern. When this processing is completed, the processing routine in RUSH mode is terminated.

In S451, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data according to the fluctuation pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for RUSH mode (not shown), and the result of the jackpot determination (win), the type of the variation pattern specification command, and the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value). The process of determining the effect pattern is performed based on the above. When this processing is completed, the processing routine in RUSH mode is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to give an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "for example," " When the "Kakekko Battle Reach" production) is performed, the appearing character (for example, the opponent character) in the specific production display is memorized as the winning character, and the music corresponding to the winning character is the acquired music. It is configured so that it can be newly selected. In addition, in a specific effect state, if it is not determined to give an advantageous state and a specific effect display is performed, the appearing character stored as a winning character is not determined. ing. That is, in a specific effect state, when a specific effect display is performed and an appearing character memorized as a winning character appears, the granting of an advantageous state is determined.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the number of selectable songs increases, it is possible to add value of changing the jackpot expectation when a specific production display is performed in a specific production state. It can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the order of determining the appearance characters in the specific effect state (for example, the scenario in the RUSH mode) is determined, and when the specific effect display is performed, the appearing characters are determined according to the determination order. In some cases, the characters appearing are determined by lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is not decided to give an advantageous state and a specific effect display is performed, an appearing character that is not stored as a winning character is determined according to the determination order. It is configured as follows. That is, when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state, the appearing characters can be randomly or randomly determined within a range in which there is no discrepancy in the jackpot expectation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to match the jackpot expectations while ensuring the randomness of the appearing characters when the specific effect display is performed in the specific effect state, and it is possible to improve the interest. ..

[Item production processing in RUSH mode]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an item effect processing in RUSH mode executed by the sub CPU 71. The item effect processing in the RUSH mode is a process for controlling the item effect in the RUSH mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 51, in S460, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 1. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the start of the RUSH mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 1, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S461. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is not 1, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S462.

In S461, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an initial item by lottery. In the present embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 61, an item display area 800 (item area) capable of displaying a plurality of items is provided in the display area 4A in the RUSH mode. The item display area 800 is a first item display area 801 for displaying the first item, a second item display area 802 for displaying the second item, and a third item display area 803 for displaying the third item. , And a fourth item display area 804 for displaying the fourth item, and an area other than the first item display area 801 to the fourth item display area 804 of the item display area 800 is framed as an item area frame display area. It is possible to perform an effect display according to the display mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining the type of the item displayed in the first item display area 801 by lottery. The types of items displayed in the first item display area 801 to the fourth item display area 804 will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S470.

In S462, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the item look-ahead pattern is being executed. The item look-ahead pattern is an effect pattern for determining the type of item by the "look-ahead effect". In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the item look-ahead pattern is being executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S465. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the item look-ahead pattern is not being executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S463.

In S463, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item look-ahead pattern based on the number of holds, the presence / absence of a hit in the hold, the type of hit, and the current item. In this process, for example, the number of holds is "4", the number of hits in the hold is "4", and the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 6" or "big hit 7" (time saving) of the second special symbol. If "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 as the current item, the first item display area has a predetermined probability. It is determined that the item pre-reading pattern in which four "items 1" are displayed (four "items 1" are aligned) is executed in the 801 to the second item display area 804.

Also, for example, the number of holds is "4", there is a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in this hold is the second special symbol "big hit 8" (time saving medium hit 8R), as the current item. When "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801, three "item 1" are displayed in the first item display area 801 to the second item display area 804 with a predetermined probability. It is decided to execute the item look-ahead pattern (there are three "items 1").

Also, for example, the number of holds is "4", there is a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in this hold is the second special symbol "big hit 9" (4R per short time), as the current item. When "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801, two "item 1" are displayed in the first item display area 801 to the second item display area 804 with a predetermined probability. Determines to execute the item look-ahead pattern (two "items 1" are aligned). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S464.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a hit is included in the hold, the number of items displayed in the item area is different depending on the number of rounds in the big hit game state that shifts depending on the hit. Therefore, if you move to the jackpot game state with two items in the item area, the number of rounds is 4R, and there is a high possibility that the number of game media that can be acquired is the smallest, and items are in the item area. If you move to the big hit game state with 3 items in place, the number of rounds is 8R, and it is highly possible that the number of game media that can be acquired is medium, and 4 items are in the item area. If the player shifts to the jackpot game state while playing, the number of rounds is 12R, and it is highly possible that the number of game media that can be acquired is the largest. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to notify not only the jackpot expectation degree but also the information regarding the amount of game media that can be acquired when the game shifts to the jackpot game state (the number of expected game media to be acquired). It is supposed to be.

However, in the above example, even when the type of hit in the hold is the second special symbol "big hit 9" (time saving medium hit 4R), the item look-ahead pattern in which three items are aligned is determined. Alternatively, the item look-ahead pattern in which four items are aligned may be determined. Further, even when the type of hit in the hold is the second special symbol "big hit 8" (time saving medium hit 8R), the item look-ahead pattern in which two items are aligned may be determined. , The item look-ahead pattern in which four items are aligned may be determined. Also, if the type of hit in the hold is "Big hit 6" or "Big hit 7" (12R-1 for medium-time reduction or 12R-2 for medium-time reduction) of the second special symbol, two items will be available. The item pre-reading pattern may be determined, or the item pre-reading pattern in which three items are aligned may be determined. That is, if the number of items in stock is large, the expected number of game media to be acquired is relatively high, and if the number of items in stock is small, the expected number of game media to be acquired is relatively low. Good.

In S464, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the determination result of S463 determines the execution of the item look-ahead pattern. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the execution of the item look-ahead pattern is determined, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S465. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the execution of the item look-ahead pattern is not determined, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S466.

In S465, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an item according to the item read-ahead pattern. In this process, for example, when the item pre-reading pattern in which two items are aligned is determined, the sub CPU 71 determines the same item as the item displayed in the first item display area 801. I do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S470.

In S466, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an item by lottery based on the number of holds, the presence / absence of a hit in the hold, the type of hit, and the current item. In this process, for example, when the number of holds is "4", the number of holds is "4", there is a hit in the hold, and "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 as the current item. , Determine "item 1" with a relatively high probability (that is, make it easy for two or more "item 1" to be aligned). On the other hand, when the number of holds is "4", there is no hit in the hold, and "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 as the current item, there is a relatively high probability that "item 1" will be displayed. Determine items other than "Item 1" (that is, make it difficult for two or more "Item 1" to be aligned).

Further, for example, the number of holds is "4", there is a hit in the hold, and the types of hits in the hold are "big hit 6" to "big hit 8" of the second special symbol (12R-1, medium-time hit, 12R-1, 12R-2 per time reduction medium or 8R per time reduction medium time), and as the current item, "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 and "item 1" is displayed in the second item display area 802. If so, the "item 1" is determined with a relatively high probability (that is, it is easy for three or more "items 1" to be aligned). On the other hand, the number of holds is "4" and there is no hit in the hold, or there is a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in this hold is the second special symbol "Big hit 9" (4R per time reduction). ), And if "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 and "item 1" is displayed in the second item display area 802 as the current item, there is a relatively high probability. Determine an item other than "Item 1" (that is, make it difficult for three or more "Item 1" to be aligned).

Further, for example, the number of holds is "4", there is a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 6" or "big hit 7" of the second special symbol (12R-1 or medium time reduction). It is 12R-2) per time reduction, and as the current item, "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 and "item 1" is displayed in the second item display area 802, and the third item display area. When "item 1" is displayed in 803, "item 1" is determined with a relatively high probability (that is, it is easy for four or more "item 1" to be aligned). On the other hand, the number of holds is "4" and there is no hit in the hold, or there is a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in this hold is "big hit 8" or "big hit 9" of the second special symbol. (8R per time saving medium or 4R per time saving medium), and as the current item, "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 and "item 1" is displayed in the second item display area 802. 3 When "Item 1" is displayed in the item display area 803, an item other than "Item 1" is determined with a relatively high probability (that is, it is difficult for four or more "Item 1" to be aligned or more. ). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S467.

In S467, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a "rainbow" in the hold display mode. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the jackpot is confirmed or the display mode (rainbow) having an extremely high expectation of jackpot is determined as the read-ahead hold change effect content or the variable hold change effect content. .. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a "rainbow" in the hold display mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S468. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no "rainbow" in the hold display mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S470.

In S468, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not three or more items are aligned or not in the determined item by the process of S465 or the process of S466. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the determined items have three or more items, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S469. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the determined items do not have three or more items, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S470. In this process, it may be determined whether or not the determined item has two or more items, or whether or not the determined item has four or more items. You may do so.

In S469, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of redetermining an item by lottery from items in a group different from the group of determined items. That is, when there is a "rainbow" in the hold display mode, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing the items so that the number of items is not three (or two or four) or more. Further, at this time, the item to be re-determined is determined from a group different from the group of items displayed in the first item display area 801. The group of items will be described later with reference to FIG. 62. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S470.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a specific display mode (for example, display mode (rainbow)) having a high expectation of big hit is displayed as the hold display mode, a predetermined number (for example, 3) is displayed as the item effect in the RUSH mode. One) It is controlled so that the above items are not aligned. That is, when it is notified that the jackpot expectation is high, the expected number of game media to be acquired is not notified.

In S470, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the item area display according to the item determined by the process of S465, the process of S466, or the process of S469. In this process, for example, when the item determined this time is "item 1", the sub CPU 71 displays this "item 1" in the first item display area 801 and up to that point, the first item display area 801. The item displayed in is shifted to the second item display area 802 and displayed, and the item previously displayed in the second item display area 802 is shifted to the third item display area 803 and displayed until then. The item displayed in the third item display area 803 is shifted to the fourth item display area 804 and displayed, and the item displayed in the fourth item display area 804 up to that point is cleared. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S471.

In S471, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there are three or more items as items displayed in the item display area 800 (item area). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that three or more items are aligned, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S472. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the number of items is not three or more, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S473. In this process, it may be determined whether or not two or more items are aligned, or whether or not four or more items are aligned.

In S472, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is a special mode based on the presence or absence of a hit in the hold and the type of hit. .. In this process, for example, the sub CPU 71 has a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 6" to "big hit 8" of the second special symbol (12R-1 in the time saving middle hit, time saving middle hit). 12R-2 or 8R per time reduction), and in the case of three items, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is changed from the normal mode (white) to the special mode with a predetermined probability. It is decided to change to the frame display mode (green) of.

Further, for example, there is a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in the hold is the second special symbol "big hit 6" or "big hit 7" (12R-1 per time reduction or medium time reduction 12R-2). , In the case of four items, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is changed from the frame display mode (white) as the normal mode (or the frame display mode (green) as the special mode) with a predetermined probability. It is decided to change to the frame display mode (red) as a special mode. In addition, there is no hit in the hold, or there is a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in this hold is the second special symbol "Big hit 9" (4R per short time), and 3 or more items are available. In the case of, it may be decided that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is set to the frame display mode (green) or the frame display mode (red) as a special mode with a probability lower than the predetermined probability. .. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S475.

In S473, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is a special mode. That is, when the number of items is less than three, the sub CPU 71 continues to perform a process of determining whether or not the frame display mode in the item area frame display area remains the special mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is a special mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S474. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is not a special mode, the sub CPU 71 ends the item effect processing routine in the RUSH mode.

In S474, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the normal mode based on the presence or absence of a hit in the hold and the type of hit. In this process, for example, when there is no hit in the hold, the sub CPU 71 changes the frame display mode in the item area frame display area from the frame display mode (green) or the frame display mode (red) as a special mode. It is decided to change to the frame display mode (white) as the mode. Further, for example, when there is a hit in the hold and the type of hit in the hold is the second special symbol "big hit 9" (time saving middle hit 4R), there is a predetermined probability in the item area frame display area. It is decided that the frame display mode remains the special mode.

Further, for example, there is a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 6" to "big hit 8" of the second special symbol (12R-1 per time reduction, 12R-2 per time reduction or medium time reduction or time reduction hit). In the middle 8R), when the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the frame display mode (green) as a special mode, it is decided to keep the frame display mode in the item area frame display area as the special mode. To do.

Further, for example, there is a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 6" to "big hit 8" of the second special symbol (12R-1 per time reduction, 12R-2 per time reduction medium, or time reduction hit). In the middle 8R), when the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the frame display mode (red) as a special mode, it is decided to keep the frame display mode in the item area frame display area as the special mode. To do. In addition, when the type of hit in the hold is "big hit 8" (time saving medium hit 8R) of the second special symbol, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is displayed as a normal mode with a predetermined probability. It may be decided to change to the aspect (white). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S475.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the item production during the RUSH mode, when a predetermined number (for example, three) or more items are prepared, the display content of the item area itself (for example, the frame display in the item area frame display area) is further displayed. The mode) may also change, and if it changes, the jackpot expectation and the number of expected game media to be acquired are also controlled to increase.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the item production during the RUSH mode, the display content of the item area itself is displayed even when the display content of the item area itself is changed and the display content of the item area itself is not prepared. If remains unchanged, the jackpot expectation and the expected number of game media to be acquired are controlled to be maintained. As a result, even if the mode of the item displayed in the specific display area does not satisfy the predetermined degree of expectation, the expectation for the big hit is maintained and the interest of the game is lowered. Is being prevented.

In S475, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the frame display mode of the item area according to the determination result of S472 or S474. When this process is completed, the item effect processing routine in the RUSH mode is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first information (for example, the first holding ball display area 701, the second holding ball display area 702, and the variable holding ball display area 703) is displayed in the first information display means (for example, the first holding ball display area 701, the second holding ball display area 702, the variable holding ball display area 703). For example, the jackpot expectation degree is notified by the display mode of the reserved ball), and the expected acquisition game is obtained by the display mode of the second information (for example, the item) displayed by the second information display means (for example, the item display area 800). It is configured to be able to notify the number of media. That is, by integrating these pieces of information, it is possible to infer which specific gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) is expected to shift to. With this configuration, it is possible to give a big hit notice that further raises the player's expectation and to notify more diverse information in a new manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the first information is a specific display mode (for example, a display mode (rainbow)) having a high expectation of a big hit, the second information display means has the same display mode. It is configured so that the information of 2 is not continuously displayed more than a predetermined number (for example, 3). With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the fact that the number of expected game media to be acquired is low even though the high hit expectation is reported. Can be done. Further, for example, even though it is notified that the jackpot expectation is high, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the more complicated notification.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition (for example, three or more items) is satisfied for the second information displayed on the second information display means, the second information display means itself is further displayed. The content (for example, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area) may also change, and when it changes, the jackpot expectation degree and / or the number of expected acquisition game media is configured to change. With this configuration, the content of the notification in the second information display means can be diversified and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Processing in normal mode]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the processing in the normal mode executed by the sub CPU 71. This process in the normal mode is a process for determining the content of the effect in the normal mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 52, in S480, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not “04H”, “08H” or “12H” is determined as the fluctuation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is to perform an operation-linked effect. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "04H", "08H" or "12H" is determined as the fluctuation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S481. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "04H", "08H" or "12H" has not been determined as the fluctuation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S482.

In S481, the sub CPU 71 refers to the operation-linked effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, and based on the type of the variation pattern specification command and the random number range (lottery value) for sub-effect selection, the operation-linked effect scenario. Performs the process of determining (operation-linked production scenario). When this processing is completed, the processing routine in the normal mode is terminated.

In S482, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for normal mode (not shown), and the result of the jackpot determination (win), the type of the variation pattern specification command, the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value), etc. Based on the above, the process of determining the effect pattern is performed. When this processing is completed, the processing routine in the normal mode is terminated.

[Hold display mode change effect processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a hold display mode change effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This hold display mode change effect process is a process for controlling the look-ahead hold change effect and the change hold change effect, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 53, in S490, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the read-ahead hold change pattern is being executed. The look-ahead hold change pattern is an effect pattern for executing an effect of changing the hold display mode (pre-read hold display mode change effect) by the “look-ahead effect” shown as an example in FIGS. 13 and 14. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the read-ahead hold change pattern is being executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S494. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the read-ahead hold change pattern is not being executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S491.

In S491, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading hold display mode change effect for the target variation. The target change indicates a hold ball (starting memory) that is the target of the look-ahead hold display mode change effect. On the other hand, the fluctuation indicates a reserved ball (starting memory) used in the special symbol game (the game) this time. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the "look-ahead effect" due to the change in the hold display mode. As described above, whether or not to execute the "look-ahead effect" due to the change in the hold display mode may be determined by the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S492.

In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the determination result of S491 is for executing the look-ahead hold display mode change effect. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the read-ahead hold display mode change effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S493. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the pre-reading hold display mode change effect is not executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S496.

In S493, the sub CPU 71 refers to the look-ahead hold change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, and refers to the winning lottery result, the number of holds, and the change pattern associated with the look-ahead target change (FIG. 12). Based on (see), the process of determining the look-ahead pending change pattern is performed. Various parameters for determining the look-ahead hold change pattern can be appropriately set. For example, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the look-ahead hold change pattern based on the winning lottery result and the number of holds. Alternatively, the look-ahead hold change pattern may be determined based on the winning lottery result or the number of holds. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S494.

In S494, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the pre-reading target variation has started to fluctuate. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the hold ball (starting memory) that is the target of the look-ahead hold display mode change effect is used in the special symbol game (the game) this time. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the pre-reading target variation has started to change, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S496. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the pre-reading target variation does not start to fluctuate, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S495.

In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the hold display mode according to the look-ahead hold change pattern. In this process, for example, when the "look-ahead hold change pattern 405" is determined, the sub CPU 71 is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage area (4). The display mode of the hold ball corresponding to the start memory (hold 4) is displayed as the display mode (white), and then the start memory is the first special symbol start storage area (3) or the second special symbol start storage area (3). As the memory is shifted to 3), the display mode of the hold ball corresponding to the start memory (hold 3) is displayed as the display mode (blue), and then the start memory is the first special symbol start memory. As the area (2) or the second special symbol start storage area (2) is shifted and stored, the display mode of the hold ball corresponding to the start memory (hold 2) is displayed as the display mode (yellow). Then, as the start memory is shifted to the first special symbol start storage area (1) or the second special symbol start storage area (1) and stored, the hold corresponding to the start memory (hold 1) is held. A process of displaying the display mode of the sphere as the display mode (green) is performed. When this process is completed, the hold display mode change effect processing routine is terminated.

In S496, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the hold display mode of the change is the display mode (rainbow). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hold display mode of the change is the display mode (rainbow), the sub CPU 71 ends the hold display mode change effect processing routine. In the present embodiment, the display mode (rainbow) has the highest expectation of a big hit as the hold display mode. Therefore, when the hold display mode of the change is the display mode (rainbow), the change described later. The pending change pattern will not be determined. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hold display mode of the change is not the display mode (rainbow), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S497 in order to determine the change hold change pattern described later.

In S497, the sub CPU 71 refers to the fluctuation hold change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the winning lottery result, the pseudo-ream number, and the fluctuation pattern associated with the fluctuation (see FIG. 12). Based on the above, the process of determining the variable hold change pattern is performed. Various parameters for determining the variable hold change pattern can be appropriately set. For example, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the variable hold change pattern based on the winning lottery result and the number of pseudo stations. Alternatively, the variable hold change pattern may be determined based on the winning lottery result or the pseudo-ream number. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S498.

In S498, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the hold display mode according to the change hold change pattern. In this process, for example, when the "variation hold change pattern 505" is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the display mode of the hold ball, which was displayed as the display mode (white) at the start of the change, to 1. It is displayed as a display mode (blue) when the second pseudo-ream is executed (pseudo-ream 1), and is displayed as a display mode (yellow) when the second pseudo-ream is executed (pseudo-ream 2). Is displayed as the display mode (green) at the time of execution (pseudo-ream 3), and is displayed as the display mode (red) at the time of execution of the fourth pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 4). When this process is completed, the hold display mode change effect processing routine is terminated.

In the present embodiment, when the target change becomes the change during the execution of the look-ahead hold change pattern, it is determined whether or not to execute the change hold change pattern. For example, it may be determined whether or not to execute the variable hold change pattern even during the execution of the look-ahead hold change pattern. In this case, the look-ahead hold change pattern and the change hold change pattern may be executed in parallel. Further, in this case, when it is decided to execute the variable hold change pattern, the look-ahead hold change pattern may be changed according to the decision result, and the look-ahead hold change pattern may be changed. A plurality of branches may be provided in advance in consideration of the change in the hold display mode due to the change hold change pattern. Further, in this case, regarding the look-ahead hold change pattern, the look-ahead hold change pattern in which the hold display mode can be changed by the change hold change pattern and the destination in which the hold display mode cannot be changed by the change hold change pattern. The reading hold change pattern may be defined in advance.

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the display mode of the information corresponding to the start storage information (for example, the holding ball) is changed before the variable display of the identification information using the start storage information is started. It is decided whether or not to change not only the big hit notice by changing the display mode according to the decision result but also when the variable display of the identification information using the start storage information starts. , It is configured to give a big hit notice by changing the display mode according to the decision result. That is, not only is it determined whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed by the so-called "look-ahead effect", but also whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed is determined even in the change. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to give a big hit notice that further raises the player's expectation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the information corresponding to the start memory information is changed in the fluctuation, whether or not to shift to the specific game state (for example, the jackpot game state) and the specific symbol variation display (for example). , Pseudo-ream) (for example, the number of pseudo-ream) is configured to determine the content of the change in the display mode. With this configuration, for example, even if the display mode of the information corresponding to the start storage information has not changed until the fluctuation starts, the information corresponding to the start storage information is displayed in the fluctuation. Since the mode may change, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation of a big hit in all the fluctuations. In addition, since the content of the change in the display mode is determined by the number of pseudo-reams, it is possible to give an interesting big hit notice by executing the pseudo-ream and changing the display mode of the reserved ball in the change.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the information corresponding to the start storage information is changed in the change, if the display mode is changed before the change starts, after the change. It is configured to determine the content of the change in the display mode based on the display mode and whether or not to shift to the specific game state (for example, the jackpot game state). With this configuration, the jackpot expectation indicated by the display mode of the information corresponding to the start memory information changed before the fluctuation starts is inherited in the fluctuation, and the display mode changes in the fluctuation. Since the jackpot expectation indicated by the display mode may be high, the change in the display mode of the reserved ball due to the so-called "look-ahead effect" and the change in the display mode of the reserved ball due to the change are linked to each other. It is possible to give a high jackpot notice.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the information corresponding to the start memory information changed before the fluctuation starts is a specific display mode (for example, a display mode (rainbow)) having a high expectation of a big hit. In some cases, it is configured so that the display mode does not change due to the change. With this configuration, even though it is notified that the jackpot expectation is high, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the more complicated notification, and also in the fluctuation. The control load can be reduced.

[Processing at the start of hitting]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a hit start process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit start process is a process for updating the above-mentioned winning character history and acquired music history, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 54, in S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the start of hitting in the RUSH mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is the start of hitting in the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S501. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not at the start of hitting in the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 ends the processing routine at the time of hitting.

In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not "17H" has been determined as the fluctuation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is to produce a "kakekko battle reach hit" effect. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "17H" has been determined as the fluctuation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S502. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "17H" has not been determined as the fluctuation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S505.

In S502, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the opponent character is a winning character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the opponent character that appeared in the "foot race battle reach hit" production this time is a character stored in the winning character history. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the opponent character is a winning character, the sub CPU 71 ends the hit start processing routine. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the opponent character is not a winning character, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the opponent character to the winning character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the battle character that appeared in this "foot race battle reach hit" production as a winning character in the winning character history. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the music corresponding to the opponent character to the acquired music. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the music corresponding to the battle character that appeared in the "foot race battle reach hit" production as acquired in the acquired music history. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S509.

In S505, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not "18H" has been determined as the fluctuation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is to produce a "special character battle reach hit" effect. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "18H" has been determined as the fluctuation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S506. On the other hand, when it is determined that "18H" has not been determined as the fluctuation pattern, the sub CPU 71 ends the hit start processing routine.

In S506, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the character 1 is a winning character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the character 1 that appears in the "special character battle reach hit" production this time is a character stored in the winning character history. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the character 1 is a winning character, the sub CPU 71 ends the hit start processing routine. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the character 1 is not a winning character, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the character 1 to a winning character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the character 1 that appeared in the "special character battle reach per hit" production as a winning character in the winning character history. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the music corresponding to the character 1 to the acquired music. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the music corresponding to the character 1 that appeared in the "special character battle reach hit" production as acquired in the acquired music history. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S509.

In S509, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not all the characters have been won. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not all of the characters 1 to 12 are stored as won in the winning character history. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that all the characters have been won, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S510. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the characters have not been won, the sub CPU 71 ends the hit start processing routine.

In S510, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the special music to the acquired music. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the special music as acquired in the acquired music history as a special privilege for winning all the characters (determined to have won). When this processing is completed, the hit start processing routine is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle") for notifying whether or not an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is given is given. It is configured so that a "reach" effect) and a special effect display (for example, a "special character battle reach" effect) for notifying that an advantageous state is given can be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the order of determining the appearance characters (for example, the opponent characters) appearing in the specific effect display (for example, the scenario in the RUSH mode) is determined and the specific effect display is performed, this is performed. It is configured so that whether or not to determine the appearing character in the determination order is further determined. Then, in the present embodiment, when a specific effect display is performed and it is determined that the appearing characters are determined in the determined order, the appearing characters are determined in the determined order, and the appearing characters are determined in the determined order. If it is not determined to determine the appearing character in, the appearing character is determined by lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, when a specific character (for example, character 1) appearing in the special effect display is determined in the specific effect display according to the determination order, the order of determination is determined. It is configured to be relatively low. That is, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, not only the granting of the advantageous state is confirmed, but also a character that is normally difficult to appear appears.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest in a series of effects (for example, battle effects) executed in a predetermined game section (for example, RUSH mode).

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to give an advantageous state in a specific effect state and a specific effect display is performed, the character appearing in the specific effect display is a winning character. When a specific effect display is performed when it is not determined to give an advantageous state, the appearing character memorized as a winning character is not determined. That is, in a specific effect state, when a specific effect display is performed and an appearing character memorized as a winning character appears, the granting of an advantageous state is determined. Further, in the present embodiment, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, the specific character is also stored as a winning character.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the series of effects executed in the predetermined game section progresses, the degree of expectation of a big hit in a specific effect display can be changed, and the interest can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the transition to a specific production state is performed, the winning character history in the previous specific production state can be inherited, and if the winning character history is inherited, it is determined. It is configured so that the determination order of the appearing characters is also inherited. With this configuration, a series of effects executed in a predetermined game section can be started from a state desired by the player depending on the presence or absence of the takeover selection operation, and the jackpot expectation degree in a specific effect display. Can also be changed, and the interest can be improved.

[Processing when winning V]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the V winning process executed by the sub CPU 71. This V-winning process is a process for determining the effect content of the V-winning effect, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 55, in S520, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the RUSH mode. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a V prize has been won in any of the big hit game states shifted from the RUSH mode. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that it is in the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S521. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub CPU 71 is not in the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 ends the V winning processing routine. The sub CPU 71 may perform the process of S521 without performing this process. That is, the sub CPU 71 may perform the following processes S521 to S523 even in the normal mode or the special mode, for example.

In S521, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a hit in the hold. That is, the sub CPU 71 wins the lottery result among the start memories stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) or the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4). Performs a process of determining whether or not there is something that has become. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a hit in the hold, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S522. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no hit in the hold, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S523. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol game, the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are more than the start memories stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4). Since the start memory stored in is preferentially used, in this process, the lottery result is a hit among the start memories stored in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4). It may be determined only whether or not there is something that has become.

In S522, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the special V winning effect data. When this processing is completed, the V winning processing routine is terminated. An example of the V winning effect based on the special V winning effect data will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

In S523, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting normal V winning effect data. When this processing is completed, the V winning processing routine is terminated. An example of the V-winning effect based on the normal V-winning effect data will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

In this V winning process, when it is determined in S520 that the player is not in the RUSH mode, the jackpot shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends (for example, the "big hit 1" of the first special symbol. "-" Big hit 4 "), and when it is determined that it is a big hit that shifts to the time-saving game state, it is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4). It is determined only whether or not there is a winning result in the start memory, and if it is determined that there is a winning result in the lottery, the process of S522 is performed and the lottery result is obtained. If it is determined that there is no hit, the process of S523 may be performed. That is, when the V prize is won in the first big hit game state in which the normal mode is changed to the RUSH mode, the lottery is performed among the start memories stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4). It may be suggested that some results are correct. Further, the sub CPU 71 may perform these processes even when it is determined in S520 that the sub CPU 71 is in the RUSH mode. That is, it is suggested that the lottery result is a hit among the start memories stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) even when the V prize is won in the RUSH mode. You may try to do so. As a result, even if the RUSH mode ends in the subsequent game and the mode is changed to the normal mode, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the RUSH mode may be changed again, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to make it.

[Direction performed on a game machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 65, various effects in the present embodiment will be described with reference to screen display examples and the like.

[Screen display example of operation-linked production]
56 to 58 are diagrams showing a screen display example of the operation interlocking effect. In FIGS. 56 to 58, a case where “scenario 1 (success)” is determined as an operation-linked effect scenario will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation interlocking effect, when the current stage is "0" to "3", the display area 4A is referred to as "continuous hitting!" In order to prompt the pressing operation to the pressing operation button 9A. Along with the characters, an image schematically showing the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when the stage shifts in each stage (that is, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift "Yes" is determined), the images corresponding to the characters 1 to 3 are displayed. Is gradually increased and displayed. On the other hand, when the stage does not shift (that is, when the push operation button 9A is operated but the step shift "none" is determined, or when the push operation button 9A is not operated), the current stage is maintained. The images corresponding to characters 1 to 3 do not increase. Then, at each stage, when the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, in the case of the fluctuation pattern "04H" (operation-linked effect failure), the operation-linked effect fails and the effect is notified that the effect does not develop. For this reason, the characters "Sorry ... not all gathered ..." are displayed, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern "08H" or "12H" (operation-linked production succeeded), the operation-linked production failed, but it was reversed. Then, the characters "Sorry ... I think it develops into reach!" Are displayed to inform that the production will develop.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the operation interlocking effect, when the current stage is "4" to "7", the display area 4A is referred to as "continuous hitting!" In order to prompt the pressing operation to the pressing operation button 9A. Along with the characters, an image schematically showing the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A is displayed. When the current stage is "7", since it is a conditional stage transition period, it is not necessary to prompt the pressing operation button 9A, but the content is the same as the other stages. Is displayed so that the player feels a sense of discomfort that the pressing operation button 9A does not easily move to the next stage even if the pressing operation button 9A is pressed. However, if the current stage is the conditional stage transition period, an image different from the other stages may be displayed. For example, along with the character "?", An image schematically showing that the pressing operation to the pressing operation button 9A is disabled (the step transition does not occur even if the pressing operation button 9A is operated) is displayed. It may be displayed, or an image having a different background color or text color may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when the stage shifts in each stage (that is, when the current stage is "4" to "6", the pressing operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift "Yes" is determined. If the current stage is "7", the images corresponding to characters 4 to 7 are gradually increased and displayed when the pressing operation button 9A is operated after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed. ing. On the other hand, when the stage does not shift (that is, when the current stage is "4" to "6", the pressing operation button 9A is operated but the stage transition "none" is determined, or the pressing operation button 9A When is not operated, when the current stage is "7", when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated), the current stage is maintained, and the images corresponding to the characters 4 to 7 are not increased. Then, at each stage, when the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, in the case of the fluctuation pattern "04H" (operation-linked effect failure), the operation-linked effect fails and the effect is notified that the effect does not develop. For this reason, the characters "Sorry ... not all gathered ..." are displayed, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern "08H" or "12H" (operation-linked production succeeded), the operation-linked production failed, but it was reversed. Then, the characters "Sorry ... I think it develops into reach!" Are displayed to inform that the production will develop.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the operation interlocking effect, when the current stage is "8" to "11", the display area 4A is referred to as "continuous hitting!" In order to prompt the pressing operation to the pressing operation button 9A. Along with the characters, an image schematically showing the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, when the current stage is "8" to "10", the stage shifts (that is, the pressing operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift "Yes" is determined. ), The images corresponding to the characters 8 to 11 are sequentially increased and displayed. Further, when the current stage is "11" and the stage shifts (that is, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated and the stage shift "Yes" is determined), the image corresponding to the character 12 is displayed. After increasing and displaying, the characters "All gathered !! Develop into reach!" Are displayed to notify that the operation-linked production is successful and the production is developing. On the other hand, in each stage, when the stage does not shift (that is, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated but the stage transition "none" is determined, or when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated), the current stage. Is maintained and does not increase the images corresponding to characters 8-12. Then, at each stage, when the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, in the case of the fluctuation pattern "04H" (operation-linked effect failure), the operation-linked effect fails and the effect is notified that the effect does not develop. For this reason, the characters "Sorry ... not all gathered ..." are displayed, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern "08H" or "12H" (operation-linked production succeeded), the operation-linked production failed, but it was reversed. Then, the characters "Sorry ... I think it develops into reach!" Are displayed to inform that the production will develop.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of production stages (for example, "0" to "11") are sequentially shifted, and when the final production stage is shifted, a predetermined production (for example, Super Reach C) is performed. In a specific effect (for example, operation-linked effect) in which is performed, when the current effect stage is a predetermined effect stage, a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A) is performed. On the condition that it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the next production stage, if it is a specific production stage (for example, a conditional stage transition period), after the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, the condition). It is configured to always shift to the next production stage on condition that a predetermined operation is performed (after the transition period of the attached stage has passed). With this configuration, it is possible to give a more interesting big hit notice.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the current production stage is a specific production stage and a predetermined operation is performed after a predetermined period (for example, a conditional stage transition period) has elapsed, the following is always performed. If a predetermined operation is performed before the predetermined period elapses, the stage is configured so as not to shift to the next production stage. With this configuration, in a specific effect, it is possible to create a state in which the effect stage does not shift even if a predetermined operation is performed, and a state in which the effect stage always shifts when a predetermined operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player who has been able to smoothly shift the production stage, and it is possible to diversify the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the current production stage is a specific production stage, a predetermined operation is invalidated in a predetermined period. With such a configuration, it is possible to control the production so as to be more linked to the operation of the player at a specific production stage, and it is possible to improve the interest in the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when a specific effect is performed based on a specific effect pattern (for example, successful operation-linked effect) that may shift to the final effect stage, the final effect stage is reached. There is a case where the transition does not occur, but in this case, it is configured to perform the predetermined effect after performing the advance notice effect (for example, operation-linked effect failure → reverse effect) foretelling that the predetermined effect will be performed. .. With this configuration, it is possible to give a certain expectation for a big hit when a specific production is performed, while diversifying the transition of the production stage.

[Screen display example of takeover selection operation screen]
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the takeover selection operation screen. In FIG. 59 and FIG. 60 described later, the display area 4A is an operation guide display area 710 that guides that the selection operation can be performed by rotating the jog dial 9B and that the determination operation can be performed by pressing the push operation button 9A. Is provided.

As shown in FIG. 59, in order to display the characters "10 seconds remaining" indicating the effective time of the takeover selection operation in the display area 4A on the takeover selection operation screen, and to prompt the decision of acceptance or rejection of the takeover of the winning character history. , "Do you want to take over the winning character history?" And "Yes / No" are displayed. The player can take over the winning character history by rotating the jog dial 9B, selecting "Yes", and pressing the push operation button 9A. Further, by rotating the jog dial 9B, selecting "No", and pressing the push operation button 9A, it is possible to prevent the winning character history from being inherited. It is also possible to prevent the winning character history from being inherited by allowing the takeover selection operation valid time to elapse without performing any operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in the display area 4A on the takeover selection operation screen, the acquired music is also taken over and the scenario in the RUSH mode is also taken over in association with taking over the winning character history. The text "If you take over the history of won characters, the probability of appearance of ○ acquired songs / ○ opponent characters will also be taken over." Is displayed.

[Screen display example of music selection operation screen]
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the music selection operation screen.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the display area 4A on the music selection operation screen, the characters "10 seconds remaining" indicating the effective time of the music selection operation are displayed, and "select a music" for prompting the selection of the music. The characters "Tene!", The characters "Song 1" indicating the currently selected song, and a triangular cursor image are displayed. The player can select a desired song by rotating the jog dial 9B to change the currently selected song and pressing the push operation button 9A. It is also possible to select a default song by allowing the valid time of the song selection operation to elapse without performing any operation.

[Screen display example in RUSH mode]
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of screen display in the RUSH mode. As shown in FIG. 61, in the display area 4A in the RUSH mode, the display area 4A includes a symbol variation display area 700 for variable display and stop display of a plurality of decorative symbols, and the above-mentioned first reserved ball display area 701 and second reserved ball display. Area 702 and the variable holding ball display area 703 are provided. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation display area 700, the first reserved ball display area 701, the second reserved ball display area 702, and the variable reserved ball display area 703 are other effect modes (for example, a normal mode or a special mode). It is also displayed in mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the above-mentioned item display area 800 is provided in the display area 4A in the RUSH mode, and the above-mentioned first item display area 801 and the second item are provided in the item display area 800. A display area 802, a third item display area 803, and a fourth item display area 804 are provided. In the present embodiment, the same item effect as in the RUSH mode may be performed even in the effect mode other than the RUSH mode (for example, the normal mode or the special mode). In this case, the item display area 800, The first item display area 801 and the second item display area 802, the third item display area 803, and the fourth item display area 804 are also displayed in other effect modes (for example, normal mode and special mode). You may.

In the display area 4A, the position and size of the symbol variation display area 700, the first reserved ball display area 701, the second reserved ball display area 702, the variable reserved ball display area 703, and the item display area 800 are provided. The range and the like are not limited to those shown in FIG. 61, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the second reserved ball display area 702 and the item display area 800 are arranged in parallel, the display mode of the reserved ball displayed in the second reserved ball display area 702 is updated, and the item displayed in the item display area 800 is updated. It may be displayed in conjunction with the update of.

[Example of items used in item production during RUSH mode]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of an item used in the item production in the RUSH mode.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the present embodiment, 12 items "item 1" to "item 12" corresponding to each of the characters 1 to 12 are defined, and one of these items is the first. It is displayed in each of the 1 item display area 801 to the 4th item display area 804.

Note that "item 1" to "item 12" may be images schematically showing characters 1 to 12 themselves, or images showing each ornament (for example, a weapon) of characters 1 to 12. There may be. In addition, special items that do not correspond to characters 1 to 12 are specified, and when this special item is displayed, the jackpot expectation and acquisition expectation are higher than when "item 1" to "item 12" are displayed. The number of game media may be increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the present embodiment, the items corresponding to the odd-numbered characters, items 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11 form a first group (odd-numbered group), and the even-numbered characters. Items 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12 corresponding to the above form a second group (even number group). This group (grouping) is referred to in S469 of FIG. 51, but can be referred to for other purposes. For example, if you want to suggest the expectation of a predetermined jackpot (for example, "big hit 7" of the first special symbol) in which the actual number of rounds is an odd number (for example, 7R), select an item from the first group. In this way, if you want to suggest the expectation of a specific jackpot (for example, "big hit 2" of the first special symbol) in which the actual number of rounds is an even number (for example, 8R), select an item from the second group. You may try to do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the information (second information) displayed in each of the first item display area 801 to the fourth item display area 804, "item 1" to "item 12" will be described as an example. However, the second information is not necessarily limited to "items", and other information as long as it has a plurality of types of display modes that allow the player to recognize that the information is different. Can also be used. For example, information consisting of 12 types of characters, numbers, or characters may be used. Further, the second information may have at least two or more different display modes, and the types are not limited to 12 types.

[Example of screen display of item production in RUSH mode]
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the item effect in the RUSH mode. In FIG. 63, the display in the item display area 800 (item area), which is a part of the display area 4A, is described.

In FIG. 63 (a), "item 1" is displayed as the first item in the first item display area 801 in the item area. At this time, when it is decided to display "item 3" as the second item, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), "item 1" displayed in the first item display area 801 is displayed. Is shifted to the second item display area 802 and displayed, and "item 3" is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. On the other hand, when it is decided to display "item 1" as the second item, "item 1" displayed in the first item display area 801 as shown in FIG. 63 (c). Is shifted to the second item display area 802 and displayed, and "item 1" is newly displayed in the first item display area 801.

Next, when it is decided to display "item 4" as the third item, as shown in (d) of FIG. 63, the first item display area 801 and the second item display area 802 are displayed. The displayed "item 1" is shifted to the second item display area 802 and the third item display area 803 and displayed, and the "item 4" is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. Here, in the states (c) and (d) of FIG. 63, two "items 1" are aligned. Therefore, when the game shifts to the big hit game state at this time, there is a high possibility that the actual number of rounds is 4R (for example, 4R per time reduction and medium hit). That is, the number of expected game media to be acquired is lower than that in the case of a set of three or a set of four, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is decided to display "item 1" as the third item, it is displayed in the first item display area 801 and the second item display area 802 as shown in FIG. 63 (e). The "item 1" that has been displayed is shifted to the second item display area 802 and the third item display area 803, and the "item 1" is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. At this time, if it is decided to change the frame display mode of the item area to the special mode, the frame display mode of the item area changes to the special mode (green). In this case, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the case where the frame display mode of the item area is the normal mode (white).

Next, when it is decided to display "item 2" as the fourth item, as shown in (f) of FIG. 63, the first item display area 801 to the third item display area 803 The displayed "item 1" is shifted to the second item display area 802 to the fourth item display area 804, and the "item 2" is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. Here, in the states (e) and (f) of FIG. 63, three "items 1" are arranged. Therefore, when the game shifts to the big hit game state at this time, there is a high possibility that the actual number of rounds is 8R (for example, 8R per time reduction and medium hit). That is, the number of expected acquisition game media is higher than in the case of the above-mentioned two sets, and the number of expected acquisition game media is lower than in the case of the four sets described later.

On the other hand, when it is decided to display "item 1" as the fourth item, it is displayed in the first item display area 801 to the third item display area 803 as shown in (g) of FIG. 63. The "item 1" that has been displayed is shifted to the second item display area 802 to the fourth item display area 804, and the "item 1" is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. Here, in the state of (g) in FIG. 63, four "items 1" are arranged. Therefore, when the game shifts to the big hit game state at this time, there is a high possibility that the actual number of rounds is 12R (for example, 12R-1, 12R-2 per time reduction and medium hit). That is, the number of expected game media to be acquired is higher than in the case of the above-mentioned two-match or three-match. At this time, if it is decided to change the frame display mode of the item area to the special mode, the frame display mode of the item area changes to the special mode (red). In this case, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the case where the frame display mode of the item area is the normal mode (white).

Further, in the state of (f) of FIG. 63, when it is determined to display "item 5" as the fifth item, as shown in (h) of FIG. 63, the fourth item display area. The "item 1" displayed in is erased, and the "item 1" displayed in the second item display area 802 and the third item display area 803 is replaced with the third item display area 803 and the fourth item display area 804. "Item 2" that was displayed by shifting to the first item display area 801 is shifted to the second item display area 802 and displayed, and "Item 5" is newly displayed as the first item. It is displayed in the area 801. At this time, if it is decided to change the frame display mode of the item area to the normal mode, the frame display mode of the item area changes to the normal mode (white). At this time, if it is not decided to change the frame display mode of the item area to the normal mode and the frame display mode of the item area is maintained in the special mode, the three items are not aligned. However, the expected jackpot and the expected number of game media to be acquired are maintained, which is the same as when all three items are available.

[Screen display example of hold display mode change effect]
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the hold display mode change effect. In FIG. 64, the display in the second reserved ball display area 702 or the variable reserved ball display area 703, which is a part of the display area 4A, is described. Further, in FIG. 64, when the “look-ahead hold change pattern 408” is determined as the look-ahead hold change pattern and the hold display mode at the start of the change is the display mode (green) as the change hold change pattern. When the first pseudo-ream is executed (pseudo-ream 1), the hold display mode is changed to the display mode (red), and when the second pseudo-ream is executed (pseudo-ream 2), the hold display mode is displayed (rainbow). ) Is determined (for example, “the variable hold change pattern 310”).

As shown in FIG. 64, when the target variation of the look-ahead is the fourth reserved ball (hold 4) in the second reserved ball display area 702, the fourth reserved ball in the second reserved ball display area 702. The display mode is changed to the display mode (blue).

Next, when the target variation of the look-ahead becomes the third reserved ball (hold 3) in the second reserved ball display area 702, the display mode of the third reserved ball in the second reserved ball display area 702 is displayed. Change to the display mode (yellow).

Next, when the target variation of the look-ahead becomes the second reserved ball (hold 2) in the second reserved ball display area 702, the display mode of the second reserved ball in the second reserved ball display area 702 is displayed. Change to the display mode (green).

Next, when the target variation of the look-ahead becomes the third reserved ball (hold 1) in the second reserved ball display area 702, the display mode of the first reserved ball in the second reserved ball display area 702 is displayed. Maintain the display mode (green).

Next, when the target variation of the look-ahead becomes the reserved ball in the variable reserved ball display area 703 (the fluctuation), the display mode of the reserved ball in the variable reserved ball display area 703 is maintained in the display mode (green). To do.

Next, when the target variation of the look-ahead is a reserved ball in the variable reserved ball display area 703 and the first pseudo-ream is executed (pseudo-ream 1), the reserved ball in the variable reserved ball display area 703 is executed. The display mode of is changed to the display mode (red).

Next, when the target variation of the look-ahead is the reserved ball in the variable reserved ball display area 703 and the second pseudo-ream is executed (pseudo-ream 2), the reserved ball in the variable reserved ball display area 703 is executed. The display mode of is changed to the display mode (rainbow).

In FIG. 64, for convenience, the display mode of the reserved sphere other than the pre-reading target variation used in the description is described as the normal display mode (white), but the display mode is not limited to this. Absent. For example, with respect to the display mode of the reserved ball other than the pre-reading target variation used in the explanation, the pre-reading hold change pattern and the fluctuation hold change pattern can be determined, and the hold display mode can be sequentially changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an example of the change in the display mode of the holding ball, a mode in which the jackpot expectation is sequentially changed by the change in the display color of the holding ball is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a change in the display mode of the holding ball, the jackpot expectation may be sequentially changed by changing the shape or pattern of the holding ball. Further, it is assumed that each item displayed in the item area described above is associated with the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation may be sequentially changed by changing the form of each item of the reserved ball.

[Screen display example of V winning effect]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the V winning effect. The upper part of FIG. 65 shows an example of a screen display of the V winning effect based on the normal V winning effect data, and the lower part of FIG. 65 shows a screen table of the V winning effect based on the special V winning effect data. An example is shown.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 65, in the V-winning production based on the normal V-winning production data, since there is no hit in the hold, "Congratulations on the V-winning!" Is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 65, in the V-winning production based on the special V-winning production data, since there is a hit in the hold, "Congratulations on the V-winning" to notify that the V-winning has been made. Along with the text "!", The text "And ... ???" is displayed to suggest that there is a hit in the hold.

In the V winning effect based on the special V winning effect data, a display may be provided to directly notify that there is a hit in the hold. For example, the characters "Congratulations on the consecutive villas in the hold !!" may be displayed to notify that there is a hit in the hold.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (for example, the jackpot game state), the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, the specific area 38A) (V winning), and the special game state (for example, the probability variation game state). ) Is satisfied, a specific effect (for example, a V winning effect) is performed, but in this case, it is determined that the reserved start memory information is used to shift to the specific game state. When there is start memory information, it is configured to perform an effect different from the case where there is no start memory information which is determined to shift to the specific game state. That is, when the V prize is won and the game state after the end of the specific game state is determined, a notification to that effect and the possibility of holding a continuous villa is notified. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the specific game state is on hold and to improve the interest.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide at least the gaming machines according to the first to tenth inventions shown below.

[Game machine according to the first and second inventions]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, the number of holdings is based on the number of held start memory information (the number of holdings) and the information indicating the judgment result of whether or not to give an advantageous state (big hit lottery result). It has been proposed that a so-called "look-ahead effect" as a jackpot notice is performed by changing the display mode of the reserved ball effect symbol indicating (Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-70864).

However, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 1, since the change pattern of the display mode of the reserved ball effect symbol is only determined from a plurality of predetermined change patterns, the effect content of the jackpot notice is There was a problem that became monotonous.

The first and second inventions have been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the first and second inventions is to provide a game machine capable of giving a big hit notice that further raises the expectation of the player.

The first invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A start storage information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start storage information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area, and
Each time the start storage information is stored in the start storage information storage means, the specific game state transition determination means (for example, a specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. For example, the main CPU61) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display) that displays variation of identification information based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means. Section 53, second special symbol display section 54),
A symbol variation display means (for example, a symbol variation display area 700) that displays a symbol variation according to the variation display of the identification information.
Among the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means, the hold information display means for displaying information (for example, a hold ball) corresponding to the start memory information used for variable display of the identification information from the next time onward. (For example, the first reserved ball display area 701, the second reserved ball display area 702) and
Among the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means, the change information display means (for example, the change hold) that displays information corresponding to the start memory information used for the change display of the identification information this time. Sphere display area 703) and
Whether or not to change the display mode of the information displayed on the hold information display means based on the start memory information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means. By changing the display mode of the information displayed on the hold information display means according to the decision result, an effect of notifying the degree of expectation of shifting to the specific game state (for example, a look-ahead hold change effect). Pre-reading expectation notification effect means (for example, sub CPU71) and
Whether or not to change the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means. By determining whether or not the information is displayed and changing the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means according to the determination result, an effect of notifying the degree of expectation of transition to the specific gaming state (for example, the variation pending change). The fluctuation expectation degree notification effect means (for example, sub CPU71) for performing the effect) is provided.
The symbol variation display means displays a specific symbol variation display (for example, a pseudo-ream) that pseudo-stops the variation display of the symbol and then displays the variation again until the variation display of the identification information is stopped. It can be done multiple times,
The variation expectation notification effect means is displayed on the variation information display means based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determination unit and the number of times (for example, pseudo-ream number) of the specific symbol variation display. It is a game machine characterized by changing the display mode of information.

In the first invention, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the information corresponding to the start storage information (for example, the holding ball) is changed before the variable display of the identification information using the start storage information is started. Not only the big hit notice is given by changing the display mode according to the decision result, but also it is decided whether or not to change when the variable display of the identification information using the start memory information is started, and the decision result is obtained. It is configured to give a big hit notice by changing the display mode according to the above. That is, not only is it determined whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed by the so-called "look-ahead effect", but also whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed is determined even in the change. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to give a big hit notice that further raises the player's expectation.

Further, in the first invention, when the display mode of the information corresponding to the start memory information is changed in the fluctuation, whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) and the specific symbol variation display (for example, the jackpot game state) are displayed. For example, it is configured to determine the content of the change in the display mode based on the number of times (for example, the number of pseudo stations). With this configuration, for example, even if the display mode of the information corresponding to the start storage information has not changed until the fluctuation starts, the information corresponding to the start storage information is displayed in the fluctuation. Since the mode may change, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation of a big hit in all the fluctuations. In addition, since the content of the change in the display mode is determined by the number of pseudo-reams, it is possible to give an interesting big hit notice by executing the pseudo-ream and changing the display mode of the reserved ball in the change.

The second invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A start storage information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start storage information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area, and
Each time the start storage information is stored in the start storage information storage means, the specific game state transition determination means (for example, a specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. For example, the main CPU61) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display) that displays variation of identification information based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means. Section 53, second special symbol display section 54),
A symbol variation display means (for example, a symbol variation display area 700) that displays a symbol variation according to the variation display of the identification information.
Among the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means, the hold information display means for displaying information (for example, a hold ball) corresponding to the start memory information used for variable display of the identification information from the next time onward. (For example, the first reserved ball display area 701, the second reserved ball display area 702) and
Among the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means, the change information display means (for example, the change hold) that displays information corresponding to the start memory information used for the change display of the identification information this time. Sphere display area 703) and
Whether or not to change the display mode of the information displayed on the hold information display means based on the start memory information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means. By changing the display mode of the information displayed on the hold information display means according to the decision result, an effect of notifying the degree of expectation of shifting to the specific game state (for example, a look-ahead hold change effect). Pre-reading expectation notification effect means (for example, sub CPU71) and
Whether or not to change the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means. By determining whether or not the information is displayed and changing the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means according to the determination result, an effect of notifying the degree of expectation of transition to the specific gaming state (for example, the variation pending change). The fluctuation expectation degree notification effect means (for example, sub CPU71) for performing the effect) is provided.
When the display mode of the information displayed on the hold information display means is changed by the read-ahead expectation notification effect means, the variation expectation notification effect means and the display mode after the change and the display mode. The gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means is changed based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means.

In the second invention, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the information corresponding to the start storage information (for example, the holding ball) is changed before the variable display of the identification information using the start storage information is started. Not only the big hit notice is given by changing the display mode according to the decision result, but also it is decided whether or not to change when the variable display of the identification information using the start memory information is started, and the decision result is obtained. It is configured to give a big hit notice by changing the display mode according to the above. That is, not only is it determined whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed by the so-called "look-ahead effect", but also whether or not the display mode of the reserved ball is changed is determined even in the change. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to give a big hit notice that further raises the player's expectation.

Further, in the second invention, when the display mode of the information corresponding to the start storage information is changed in the change, if the display mode is changed before the change starts, after the change. Is configured to determine the content of the change in the display mode based on the display mode of the above and whether or not to shift to the specific game state (for example, the jackpot game state). With this configuration, the jackpot expectation indicated by the display mode of the information corresponding to the start memory information changed before the fluctuation starts is inherited in the fluctuation, and the display mode changes in the fluctuation. Since the jackpot expectation indicated by the display mode may be high, the change in the display mode of the reserved ball due to the so-called "look-ahead effect" and the change in the display mode of the reserved ball due to the change are linked to each other. It is possible to give a high jackpot notice.

Moreover, the second invention is
The fluctuation expectation notification effect means shifts the display mode of the information displayed on the hold information display means to the specific gaming state by the specific game state transition determination means by the look-ahead expectation notification effect means. When the display mode is changed to a specific display mode (for example, a display mode (rainbow)) with a high degree of expectation, it is determined that the display mode of the information displayed on the variable information display means is changed. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it does not.

Further, in the second invention, the display mode of the information corresponding to the start memory information changed before the fluctuation starts becomes a specific display mode (for example, a display mode (rainbow)) having a high expectation of a big hit. If so, it is configured so that the display mode does not change due to the change. With this configuration, even though it is notified that the jackpot expectation is high, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the more complicated notification, and also in the fluctuation. The control load can be reduced.

According to the first and second inventions, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of giving a big hit notice that further raises the expectation of the player.

[Game machine according to the third invention]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot expectation that displays an effect that prompts the player to operate the external input switch and indicates a high probability of shifting to the jackpot gaming state when the external input switch is operated. It has been proposed that a jackpot notice is given by displaying the degree (see Prior Art Document 2: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-105247).

However, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 2, it is only determined whether or not the jackpot expectation is displayed depending on whether or not the external input switch is operated. There was a problem that became monotonous.

The third invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the third invention is to provide a game machine capable of giving a notice regarding a more interesting advantageous state.

The third invention is
An advantageous state determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display unit 54) that displays variations in identification information based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means.
An effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) for producing an effect,
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the effect execution means,
It is provided with an operation means (for example, a pressing operation button 9A) capable of accepting a predetermined operation of the player.
The effect executing means can perform a specific effect (for example, an operation-linked effect).
The specific effect sequentially shifts a plurality of effect stages (for example, "0" to "11"), and when the final effect stage is reached, a predetermined effect (for example, a supermarket) is used. Reach C) is performed,
The plurality of production stages include a predetermined production stage and a specific production stage (for example, a conditional stage transition period).
The effect control means is used in the specific effect.
When the current production stage is the predetermined production stage, it is decided by lottery whether or not to move to the next production stage on the condition that the predetermined operation is performed, and according to the decision result. Move to the next production stage,
When the current production stage is the specific production stage, the predetermined operation is always performed after the predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed). It is a game machine characterized by shifting to the next production stage.

In the third invention, a plurality of production stages (for example, "0" to "11") are sequentially shifted, and when the final production stage is reached, a predetermined production (for example, Super Reach C) is performed. In a specific effect (for example, operation-linked effect), when the current effect stage is a predetermined effect stage, it is a condition that a predetermined operation (for example, a press operation to the press operation button 9A) is performed. In addition, it is decided by lottery whether or not to shift to the next production stage, and if it is a specific production stage (for example, a conditional stage transition period), after a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, a conditional stage transition). It is configured to always move to the next production stage on condition that a predetermined operation is performed after the period has elapsed. With this configuration, it is possible to give a more interesting big hit notice.

The third invention is described above, wherein the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, a conditional stage transition period) has elapsed in the specific production stage. It is a game machine.

Further, in the third invention, when the current production stage is a specific production stage and a predetermined operation is performed after a predetermined period (for example, a conditional stage transition period) has elapsed, the operation is always performed. It is configured so as to shift to the next production stage and not to shift to the next production stage if a predetermined operation is performed before the predetermined period elapses. With this configuration, in a specific effect, it is possible to create a state in which the effect stage does not shift even if a predetermined operation is performed, and a state in which the effect stage always shifts when a predetermined operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player who has been able to smoothly shift the production stage, and it is possible to diversify the production.

Moreover, the third invention is
The above-described operation means is characterized in that, in the specific effect, when the current effect stage is the specific effect stage, the operation cannot be accepted during the predetermined period. It is a game machine.

Further, in the third invention, when the current production stage is a specific production stage, a predetermined operation is invalidated in a predetermined period. With such a configuration, it is possible to control the production so as to be more linked to the operation of the player at a specific production stage, and it is possible to improve the interest in the production.

Moreover, the third invention is
The specific effect includes a first specific effect pattern (for example, successful operation-linked effect) that may shift to the final effect stage, and a second specific effect that does not have the possibility of shifting to the final effect stage. (For example, operation-linked production failure), and
The effect control means is either a case where the specific effect is performed based on the first specific effect pattern or a case where the specific effect is performed based on the second specific effect pattern. Even if there is, if a specific time (for example, operation-linked effect effective time) has elapsed since the start of the specific effect, the specific effect is terminated.
When the specific effect performed based on the first specific effect pattern is terminated, if the final effect stage has not been reached, a notice for notifying that the predetermined effect will be performed. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the predetermined effect is performed after the effect (for example, operation-linked effect failure → reverse effect) is performed.

Further, in the third invention, even when a specific effect is performed based on a specific effect pattern (for example, successful operation-linked effect) that may shift to the final effect stage, the final effect stage. In this case, it is configured to perform the predetermined effect after performing the advance notice effect (for example, operation-linked effect failure → reverse effect) foretelling that the predetermined effect will be performed. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to give a certain expectation for a big hit when a specific production is performed, while diversifying the transition of the production stage.

According to the third invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of giving a notice regarding a more interesting advantageous state.

[Game machine according to the fourth and fifth inventions]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a music piece to be played in an advantageous state has been proposed so that the player can select the music (see Prior Art Document 3: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-125519).

By the way, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 3, since the music that can be selected by the player is predetermined, there is a problem that the interest in selecting the music decreases after playing the game to some extent.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to increase the selectable music every time a certain number of games, for example, a certain number of games are played, but even in such a case, the interest is improved. It is hard to say that it can be fully planned.

The fourth and fifth inventions have been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and can improve the interest by adding value when increasing the number of songs that the player can select. The purpose is to provide an opportunity.

The fourth invention is
An advantageous state determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display unit 54) that displays variations in identification information based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means.
An operation means (for example, push operation button 9A, jog dial 9B) capable of accepting operations related to the player's production, and
An effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) that displays an effect,
A music output means (for example, a speaker 10) for outputting music, and
The effect display means and the effect control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the music output means are provided.
In the effect display means, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), one character appears from a plurality of predetermined characters (for example, characters 1 to 12), and the appearing character (for example, a battle) appears. A character) and a predetermined character (for example, the main character) play against each other, and a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect) is performed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is given depending on the result of the battle. Is possible,
In the specific effect display, a first specific effect display pattern (for example, "per hit of Kakekko Battle Reach") is notified that the battle result is the victory of the predetermined character and the advantageous state is given. ), And a second specific effect display pattern (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach Loss") in which it is notified that the battle result is the victory of the appearing character and the advantageous state is not given.
The music output means can output a plurality of music corresponding to the plurality of characters.
The effect control means
When it is determined by the advantageous state determining means that the advantageous state is to be imparted in the specific effect state, and when the first specific effect display pattern is selected, the characters are selected from among the plurality of characters. The hit character determining means for determining the appearing character (for example, the processing of S447 in the processing during the RUSH mode shown in FIG. 50) and
The hit character history storage means (for example, the process of S503 in the hit start process shown in FIG. 54) for storing the appearing character determined by the hit character determination means, and
When a player performs a music selection operation on the operation means, the music increasing means (for example, FIG. 54) increases the selectable music based on the appearing character stored by the hit character history storage means. (Processing of S504 in the processing at the start of hitting) shown in
In the specific effect state, when it is determined by the advantageous state determining means that the advantageous state is not imparted and the second specific effect display pattern is selected, the hit character history storage is performed. A lost character determining means (for example, processing of S448 and S449 in the processing during the RUSH mode shown in FIG. 50) for determining the appearing character from the plurality of characters other than the appearing character stored by the means is provided. It is a game machine characterized by that.

In the fourth invention, when it is determined to give an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach") is given. When the production) is performed, the appearing character (for example, the opponent character) in the specific production display is memorized as a winning character, and the music corresponding to the winning character becomes a new acquired music. It is configured to be selectable. In addition, in a specific effect state, if it is not determined to give an advantageous state and a specific effect display is performed, the appearing character stored as a winning character is not determined. ing. That is, in a specific effect state, when a specific effect display is performed and an appearing character memorized as a winning character appears, the granting of an advantageous state is determined.

Therefore, in the fourth invention, as the number of selectable songs increases, it is possible to add value of changing the jackpot expectation when a specific production display is performed in a specific production state. Can be improved.

The fifth invention is
An advantageous state determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display unit 54) that displays variations in identification information based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means.
An operation means (for example, push operation button 9A, jog dial 9B) capable of accepting operations related to the player's production, and
An effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) that displays an effect,
A music output means (for example, a speaker 10) for outputting music, and
The effect display means and the effect control means (for example, sub CPU 71) for controlling the music output means are provided.
In the effect display means, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), one character appears from a plurality of predetermined characters (for example, characters 1 to 12), and the appearing character (for example, a battle) appears. A character) and a predetermined character (for example, the main character) play against each other, and a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect) is performed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is given depending on the result of the battle. Is possible,
In the specific effect display, a first specific effect display pattern (for example, "per hit of Kakekko Battle Reach") is notified that the battle result is the victory of the predetermined character and the advantageous state is given. ), And a second specific effect display pattern (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach Loss") in which it is notified that the battle result is the victory of the appearing character and the advantageous state is not given.
The music output means can output a plurality of music corresponding to the plurality of characters.
The effect control means
In the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed, the determination order of the plurality of characters is one character determination order from a plurality of predetermined character determination orders (for example, scenarios 1 to 24). (For example, the process of S362 in the press operation button operation determination process shown in FIG. 46) and the character determination order determining means for determining
In the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed, the character determination order for determining whether or not to determine the appearing character using the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means. Use determining means (for example, processing of S446 in processing in RUSH mode shown in FIG. 50) and
In the specific effect state, when it is determined by the advantageous state determining means that the advantageous state is to be imparted, and when the first specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order use determination means When it is decided to use the character determination order, the appearance character is determined from the plurality of characters according to the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means, and the character is determined. When the determination order use determination means has not determined to use the character determination order, the hit character determination means (for example, shown in FIG. 50) determines the appearing character from the plurality of characters by lottery. Processing of S447 in processing during RUSH mode) and
The hit character history storage means (for example, the process of S503 in the hit start process shown in FIG. 54) for storing the appearing character determined by the hit character determination means, and
When a player performs a music selection operation on the operation means, the music increasing means (for example, FIG. 54) increases the selectable music based on the appearing character stored by the hit character history storage means. (Processing of S504 in the processing at the start of hitting) shown in
In the specific effect state, when it is determined by the advantageous state determining means that the advantageous state is not imparted and the second specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order determining means. Loss-time character determination means for determining the appearance character from the plurality of characters excluding the appearance character stored by the hit character history storage means according to the character determination order determined by (for example, FIG. 50). It is a gaming machine provided with the above-mentioned processing of S448 and S449 in the processing during the RUSH mode).

In the fifth invention, when it is determined to give an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach") is given. When the production) is performed, the appearing character (for example, the opponent character) in the specific production display is memorized as a winning character, and the music corresponding to the winning character becomes a new acquired music. It is configured to be selectable. In addition, in a specific effect state, if it is not determined to give an advantageous state and a specific effect display is performed, the appearing character stored as a winning character is not determined. ing. That is, in a specific effect state, when a specific effect display is performed and an appearing character memorized as a winning character appears, the granting of an advantageous state is determined.

Therefore, in the fifth invention, as the number of selectable songs increases, it is possible to add value of changing the jackpot expectation when a specific production display is performed in a specific production state. Can be improved.

Further, in the fifth invention, the order of determining the appearance characters in a specific effect state (for example, the scenario in the RUSH mode) is determined, and when the specific effect display is performed, the appearing characters are determined in the order of determination. In some cases, it is decided, and in some cases, the appearing character is decided by lottery. Further, in the fifth invention, when it is not decided to give an advantageous state and a specific effect display is performed, an appearance character that is not stored as a winning character is determined according to the determination order. It is configured to do. That is, when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state, the appearing characters can be randomly or randomly determined within a range in which there is no discrepancy in the jackpot expectation.

Therefore, in the fifth invention, it is possible to match the jackpot expectations while ensuring the randomness of the appearing characters when the specific effect display is performed in the specific effect state, and to improve the interest. it can.

According to the fourth and fifth inventions, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest by adding value when increasing the number of songs that the player can select.

[Game machine according to the sixth and seventh inventions]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, if a specific reach is generated to shift to an advantageous state during a special gaming state (probability changing gaming state) in which a judgment result indicating that an advantageous state is given is likely to be obtained, a series of productions It has been proposed that the story progresses (see Prior Art Document 4: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-115444).

However, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 4, since the story in the series of productions only progresses in a predetermined order, there is a problem that the series of productions is monotonous and uninteresting. ..

The sixth and seventh inventions have been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the sixth and seventh inventions is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in a series of productions performed in a predetermined game section. ..

The sixth invention is
An advantageous state determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display unit 54) that displays variations in identification information based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means.
An effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) that displays an effect,
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for controlling the effect display means is provided.
The effect display means
In a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), one character appears from a plurality of predetermined characters (for example, characters 1 to 12), and the appearing character (for example, an opponent character) and a predetermined character appear. (For example, a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect) that informs whether or not the advantageous state is given depending on the battle result when the main character is played against the character.
In the specific effect state, a specific character (for example, character 1) among the plurality of characters appears, the specific character and the predetermined character play against each other, and the advantageous state is given according to the battle result. It is possible to perform a special effect display (for example, "special character battle reach" effect) to notify that.
The effect control means
In the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed, the determination order of the plurality of characters is one character determination order from a plurality of predetermined character determination orders (for example, scenarios 1 to 24). (For example, the process of S362 in the press operation button operation determination process shown in FIG. 46) and the character determination order determining means for determining
In the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed, the character determination order for determining whether or not to determine the appearing character using the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means. Use determining means (for example, processing of S446 in processing in RUSH mode shown in FIG. 50) and
When the specific effect display is performed in the specific effect state, if it is determined by the character determination order use determination means to use the character determination order, the character determination order determination means determines. If the appearing character is determined from the plurality of characters according to the character determination order and the character determination order is not determined to be used by the character determination order use determination means, the character determination order is determined by lottery. A character determining means for determining the appearing character from a plurality of characters (for example, the processing of S447 in the processing during the RUSH mode shown in FIG. 50) is provided.
In the plurality of character determination orders, the specific character is a gaming machine characterized in that the rank determined as the appearing character by the character determination means is relatively low.

In the sixth invention, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect) for notifying whether or not an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is given is given. ) And a special effect display (for example, a "special character battle reach" effect) for notifying that an advantageous state is given. Further, in the sixth invention, when the order of determining the appearance characters (for example, the opponent characters) appearing in the specific effect display (for example, the scenario in the RUSH mode) is determined and the specific effect display is performed, the specific effect display is performed. It is configured so that whether or not the appearance character is determined in this determination order is further determined. Then, in the sixth invention, when a specific effect display is performed, if it is determined to determine the appearing characters in the determined order, the appearing characters are determined in the determined order, and the determination is made. If it is not decided to determine the appearing characters in order, the appearing characters are determined by lottery. Further, in the sixth invention, the order in which a specific character (for example, character 1) appearing in a special effect display is determined when the appearing character is determined in the determination order in the specific effect display. Is configured to be relatively low. That is, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, not only the granting of the advantageous state is confirmed, but also a character that is normally difficult to appear appears.

Therefore, in the sixth invention, it is possible to improve the interest in a series of effects (for example, battle effects) executed in a predetermined game section (for example, RUSH mode).

The seventh invention is
An advantageous state determining means (for example, the main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display unit 53, second special symbol display unit 54) that displays variations in identification information based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means.
An effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) that displays an effect,
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for controlling the effect display means is provided.
The effect display means
In a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), one character appears from a plurality of predetermined characters (for example, characters 1 to 12), and the appearing character (for example, an opponent character) and a predetermined character appear. (For example, a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect) that informs whether or not the advantageous state is given depending on the battle result when the main character is played against the character.
In the specific effect state, a specific character (for example, character 1) among the plurality of characters appears, the specific character and the predetermined character play against each other, and the advantageous state is given according to the battle result. It is possible to perform a special effect display (for example, "special character battle reach" effect) to notify that.
In the specific effect display, a first specific effect display pattern (for example, "per hit of Kakekko Battle Reach") is notified that the battle result is the victory of the predetermined character and the advantageous state is given. ), And a second specific effect display pattern (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach Loss") in which it is notified that the battle result is the victory of the appearing character and the advantageous state is not given.
The effect control means
In the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed, the determination order of the plurality of characters is one character determination order from a plurality of predetermined character determination orders (for example, scenarios 1 to 24). (For example, the process of S362 in the press operation button operation determination process shown in FIG. 46) and the character determination order determining means for determining
In the specific effect state, when the specific effect display is performed, the character determination order for determining whether or not to determine the appearing character using the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means. Use determining means (for example, processing of S446 in processing in RUSH mode shown in FIG. 50) and
In the specific effect state, when it is determined by the advantageous state determining means that the advantageous state is to be imparted, and when the first specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order use determination means When it is decided to use the character determination order, the appearance character is determined from the plurality of characters according to the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means, and the character is determined. When the determination order use determination means has not determined to use the character determination order, the hit character determination means (for example, shown in FIG. 50) determines the appearing character from the plurality of characters by lottery. Processing of S447 in processing during RUSH mode) and
The hit character history storage means (for example, the process of S503 in the hit start process shown in FIG. 54) for storing the appearing character determined by the hit character determination means, and
In the specific effect state, when it is determined by the advantageous state determining means that the advantageous state is not imparted and the second specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order determining means. Loss-time character determination means for determining the appearance character from the plurality of characters excluding the appearance character stored by the hit character history storage means according to the character determination order determined by (for example, FIG. 50). The processing of S448 and S449 in the processing during the RUSH mode shown) and
In the plurality of character determination orders, the specific character has a relatively low rank determined as the appearing character by the character determination means.
The hit character history storage means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the special effect display is performed in the specific effect state, the specific character is stored as the appearing character.

In the seventh invention, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect) for notifying whether or not an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is given is given. ) And a special effect display (for example, a "special character battle reach" effect) for notifying that an advantageous state is given. Further, in the seventh invention, when the order of determining the appearing characters (for example, the opponent characters) appearing in the specific effect display (for example, the scenario in the RUSH mode) is determined and the specific effect display is performed, the specific effect display is performed. It is configured so that whether or not the appearance character is determined in this determination order is further determined. Then, in the seventh invention, when a specific effect display is performed, if it is determined to determine the appearing characters in the determined order, the appearing characters are determined in the determined order, and the determination is made. If it is not decided to determine the appearing characters in order, the appearing characters are determined by lottery. Further, in the seventh invention, the order in which a specific character (for example, character 1) appearing in a special effect display is determined when the appearing character is determined in the determination order in the specific effect display. Is configured to be relatively low. That is, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, not only the granting of the advantageous state is confirmed, but also a character that is normally difficult to appear appears.

Therefore, in the seventh invention, it is possible to improve the interest in a series of effects (for example, battle effects) executed in a predetermined game section (for example, RUSH mode).

Further, in the seventh invention, when it is determined to give an advantageous state in a specific effect state and a specific effect display is performed, the appearing character in the specific effect display has won. When a specific effect display is performed when the character is memorized as a character and it is not decided to give an advantageous state, the appearing character memorized as a victorious character is not determined. That is, in a specific effect state, when a specific effect display is performed and an appearing character memorized as a winning character appears, the granting of an advantageous state is determined. Further, in the seventh invention, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, the specific character is also stored as a winning character.

Therefore, in the seventh invention, as a series of effects executed in a predetermined game section progresses, the degree of expectation of a big hit in a specific effect display can be changed, and the interest can be improved.

Moreover, the seventh invention is
It is equipped with an operation means (for example, push operation button 9A, jog dial 9B) capable of accepting operations related to the player's production.
If the player performs a takeover selection operation to the operating means when the transition to the specific effect state is performed, the appearance stored by the hit character history storage means in the previous specific effect state. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the character is taken over, and the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means is also inherited.

Further, in the seventh invention, when the transition to a specific production state is made, the winning character history in the previous specific production state can be taken over, and if the winning character history is taken over, it is determined. It is configured so that the determination order of the appearing characters is also inherited. With this configuration, a series of effects executed in a predetermined game section can be started from a state desired by the player depending on the presence or absence of the takeover selection operation, and the jackpot expectation degree in a specific effect display. Can also be changed, and the interest can be improved.

According to the sixth and seventh inventions, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest in a series of effects performed in a predetermined game section.

[Game machine according to the eighth and ninth inventions]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, the number of holdings is based on the number of held start memory information (the number of holdings) and the information indicating the judgment result of whether or not to give an advantageous state (big hit lottery result). It has been proposed that a so-called "look-ahead effect" as a jackpot notice is performed by changing the display mode of the reserved ball effect symbol indicating (Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-70864).

However, in the game machine shown in Prior Art Document 1, since the change pattern of the display mode of the reserved ball effect symbol is only determined from a plurality of predetermined change patterns, the effect content of the jackpot notice is There was a problem that became monotonous.

Further, in such a game machine, the information that can be notified by changing the display mode of the reserved ball effect symbol is limited, and a game machine that can notify more diverse information in a new mode is desired. Was there.

The eighth and ninth inventions have been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and a game capable of giving a big hit notice that further raises the expectation of the player and notifying a wider variety of information in a new manner. The purpose is to provide an opportunity.

The eighth invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A start storage information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start storage information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area, and
Each time the start storage information is stored in the start storage information storage means, the specific game state transition determination means (for example, a specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. For example, the main CPU61) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display) that displays variation of identification information based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means. Section 53, second special symbol display section 54),
A symbol variation display means (for example, a symbol variation display area 700) that displays a symbol variation according to the variation display of the identification information.
The first information display means (for example, the first hold ball display area 701, the second hold ball) that displays the first information (for example, the hold ball) corresponding to the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means. Display area 702, the variable hold ball display area 703), and
A second information display means (for example, an item display area 800) capable of displaying a plurality of second information (for example, an item) different from the first information, and
The first display mode determining means (for example, the hold display shown in FIG. 53) that determines the display mode of the first information displayed on the first information display means based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determining means. Mode change effect processing) and
A second display mode determining means (for example, RUSH shown in FIG. 51) that sequentially determines a display mode of the second information displayed by the second information display means based on a determination result by the specific game state transition determining means. Item production processing in mode), equipped with
The specific gaming state includes a plurality of specific gaming states having different numbers of game media (for example, a substantial number of rounds) that can be acquired.
In the first information display means, the display mode of the first information displayed on the first information display means is determined by the first display mode determining means based on whether or not the player shifts to the specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree indicating whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state.
The second information display means is displayed on the second information display means based on the number of game media that can be acquired when the second display mode determining means shifts to the specific gaming state. By determining the display mode of the information in 2, it is possible to notify the expected number of game media to be acquired, which indicates the number of game media that can be acquired when shifting to the specific game state. It is a game machine to play.

Moreover, the eighth invention is
In the second display mode determining means, the larger the number of expected acquired game media when shifting to the specific gaming state, the more the second information of the same display mode is continuously displayed on the second information display means. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the display mode of the second information is determined so that the number of the information is large.

In the eighth invention, the first information (for example, hold) displayed in the first information display means (for example, the first hold ball display area 701, the second hold ball display area 702, and the variable hold ball display area 703). The jackpot expectation degree is notified by the display mode of the sphere), and the expected number of game media to be acquired is determined by the display mode of the second information (for example, the item) displayed by the second information display means (for example, the item display area 800). It is configured to be able to notify. That is, by integrating these pieces of information, it is possible to infer which specific gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) is expected to shift to. With this configuration, it is possible to give a big hit notice that further raises the player's expectation and to notify more diverse information in a new manner.

Moreover, the eighth invention is
The second information display means includes a plurality of second information display areas (for example, first item display areas 801 to fourth item display areas 804) for displaying each of the plurality of the second information, and a plurality of the second information display areas. A frame display area other than the second information display area (for example, an item area frame display area) is included.
When it is determined by the second display mode determining means that the second information of the same display mode is continuously displayed in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more on the second information display means, the said A frame display mode determining means for determining whether or not the display mode of the frame display area is a special mode based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means (for example, the item effect processing in the RUSH mode shown in FIG. 51). The game machine described above, characterized in that it is provided with.

Further, in the eighth invention, when a predetermined condition (for example, three or more items) is satisfied for the second information displayed on the second information display means, the second information display means itself is further provided. The display content (for example, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area) may also change, and when it changes, the jackpot expectation degree and / or the number of expected acquisition game media is configured to change. With this configuration, the content of the notification in the second information display means can be diversified and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The ninth invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
A start storage information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start storage information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area, and
Each time the start storage information is stored in the start storage information storage means, the specific game state transition determination means (for example, a specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. For example, the main CPU61) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display) that displays variation of identification information based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means. Section 53, second special symbol display section 54),
A symbol variation display means (for example, a symbol variation display area 700) that displays a symbol variation according to the variation display of the identification information.
The first information display means (for example, the first hold ball display area 701, the second hold ball) that displays the first information (for example, the hold ball) corresponding to the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means. Display area 702, the variable hold ball display area 703), and
A second information display means (for example, an item display area 800) capable of displaying a plurality of second information (for example, an item) different from the first information, and
The first display mode determining means (for example, the hold display shown in FIG. 53) that determines the display mode of the first information displayed on the first information display means based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determining means. Mode change effect processing) and
A second display mode determining means (for example, RUSH shown in FIG. 51) that sequentially determines a display mode of the second information displayed by the second information display means based on a determination result by the specific game state transition determining means. Item production processing in mode), equipped with
The specific gaming state includes a plurality of specific gaming states having different numbers of game media (for example, a substantial number of rounds) that can be acquired.
In the first information display means, the display mode of the first information displayed on the first information display means is determined by the first display mode determining means based on whether or not the player shifts to the specific gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree indicating whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state.
The second information display means is displayed on the second information display means based on the number of game media that can be acquired when the second display mode determining means shifts to the specific gaming state. By determining the display mode of the information in 2, it is possible to notify the expected number of game media to be acquired, which indicates the number of game media that can be acquired when shifting to the specific game state.
In the second display mode determining means, the larger the number of expected acquired game media when shifting to the specific gaming state, the more the second information of the same display mode is continuously displayed on the second information display means. The display mode of the second information is determined so that the number of pieces is large, but the first information display means is the first display mode (for example, a display mode (rainbow)) in which the expectation of a big hit is high. When the information of the above is displayed, the second information of the same display mode is not continuously displayed in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more on the second information display means. It is a gaming machine characterized in that a display mode is determined.

In the ninth invention, the first information (for example, hold) displayed in the first information display means (for example, the first hold ball display area 701, the second hold ball display area 702, and the variable hold ball display area 703). The jackpot expectation degree is notified by the display mode of the sphere), and the expected number of game media to be acquired is determined by the display mode of the second information (for example, the item) displayed by the second information display means (for example, the item display area 800). It is configured to be able to notify. That is, by integrating these pieces of information, it is possible to infer which specific gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) is expected to shift to. With this configuration, it is possible to give a big hit notice that further raises the player's expectation and to notify more diverse information in a new manner.

Further, in the ninth invention, when the display mode of the first information is a specific display mode (for example, a display mode (rainbow)) having a high expectation of a big hit, the display mode is the same as that of the second information display means. The second information is configured so as not to be continuously displayed in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the fact that the number of expected game media to be acquired is low even though the high hit expectation is reported. Can be done. Further, for example, even though it is notified that the jackpot expectation is high, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the more complicated notification.

Moreover, the ninth invention is
The second information display means includes a plurality of second information display areas (for example, first item display areas 801 to fourth item display areas 804) for displaying each of the plurality of the second information, and a plurality of the second information display areas. A frame display area other than the second information display area (for example, an item area frame display area) is included.
When it is determined by the second display mode determining means that the second information of the same display mode is continuously displayed in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more on the second information display means, the said A frame display mode determining means for determining whether or not the display mode of the frame display area is a special mode based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means (for example, the item effect processing in the RUSH mode shown in FIG. 51). The game machine described above, characterized in that it is provided with.

Further, in the ninth invention, when a predetermined condition (for example, three or more items) is satisfied for the second information displayed on the second information display means, the second information display means itself is further provided. The display content (for example, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area) may also change, and when it changes, the jackpot expectation degree and / or the number of expected acquisition game media is configured to change. With this configuration, the content of the notification in the second information display means can be diversified and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

According to the eighth and ninth inventions, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of giving a big hit notice that further raises the expectation of the player and notifying a wider variety of information in a new manner.

[Game machine according to the tenth invention]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state, if any of the reserved start memory information is determined to shift to the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state is in progress. It has been proposed to notify the so-called "holding consecutive villas" by adding the number of rounds scheduled to be executed during the next big hit game state to the number of rounds scheduled to be executed. Reference 5: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-130192).

However, in the game machine shown in the prior art document 5, for example, when it is determined that the jackpot game state in which the number of rounds to be executed is small is held and the above-mentioned notification is performed, the game is performed instead. There is a problem that the interest may be lowered, and for example, depending on the specifications of the game machine, the above-mentioned notification may not be appropriately performed.

The tenth invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and provides a game machine capable of appropriately notifying that the jackpot game state is on hold and improving the interest. With the goal.

The tenth invention is
A game board (for example, game board 1) having a game area in which the game medium can be rolled, and
A starting area (for example, a first starting port 32 and a second starting port 33) provided in the game area and through which a game medium can pass,
It is provided in the game area and can be varied into a first aspect in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second aspect in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted, and has a specific area (for example, a specific area 38A) through which the game medium can pass. With a variable winning device (for example, a large winning opening 37),
A start storage information storage means (for example, a main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start storage information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area, and
Each time the start storage information is stored in the start storage information storage means, the specific game state transition determination means (for example, a specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. For example, the main CPU61) and
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display) that displays variation of identification information based on the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means. Section 53, second special symbol display section 54),
A specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls the game state to the specific game state, provided that the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display means has a specific display mode.
On condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, the determination result of shifting to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means after the end of the specific game state is relative. A special game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) that controls a special game state (for example, a probabilistic game state) that is easily obtained in
An effect executing means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 4) for producing an effect,
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) for controlling the effect execution means is provided.
The specific game state control means can perform control that makes it relatively easy for the game medium to pass through the specific area at least during a specific period (for example, a specific second round game) during the specific game state. And
In the specific game state, when the game medium passes through the specific area and the condition for transition to the special game state is satisfied, the effect execution means indicates a specific effect (for example, a V winning effect). ) Is possible,
In the specific game state, the effect control means stores the start memory stored in the start storage information storage means when the game medium passes through the specific area and satisfies the condition for shifting to the special game state. When the information includes the start memory information determined to be shifted to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means, the first effect (for example, the special V winning effect) is used as the specific effect. (V winning effect based on data) is executed by the effect executing means, and when the start memory information determined to be transferred to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means is not included, the specific is specified. As the effect of the above, the gaming machine is characterized in that a second effect different from the first effect (for example, a V winning effect based on normal V winning effect data) is executed by the effect executing means.

In the tenth invention, in the specific gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state), the gaming medium passes through the specific area (for example, the specific area 38A) (V winning) and enters the special gaming state (for example, the probabilistic gaming state). When the transition condition is satisfied, a specific effect (for example, a V winning effect) is performed, but in this case, the start memory information that is held is determined to shift to the specific game state. If there is, it is configured to perform an effect different from the case where there is no start memory information that is determined to shift to the specific gaming state. That is, when the V prize is won and the game state after the end of the specific game state is determined, a notification to that effect and the possibility of holding a continuous villa is notified. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify that the specific game state is on hold and to improve the interest.

According to the tenth invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying that the jackpot gaming state is on hold so as to improve the interest.

[Examples of other embodiments]
Next, examples of other embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69.

FIG. 66 is a perspective view showing a large winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. The same or similar components as those according to the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 66 is provided with only one large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 66, a large winning opening 37 is provided in a part of the game board. Inside the grand prize opening 37, a ball passage 37B for guiding the game ball downward is formed. At the lower end of the ball passage 37B, a specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B are provided so as to be adjacent to each other on the left and right sides. A large winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at a position where the large winning opening 37 enters the ball passage. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39'that can be displaced to the left or right is provided in the vicinity of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B inside the ball passage 37B. The position where the displacement member 39'is shown by a solid line in FIG. 66 is the position after the displacement, and the position where the displacement member 39'is shown by a virtual line in FIG. 66 is the initial position.

The displacement member 39'switches the specific region 38A into an open state or a closed state. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 66, when the displacement member 39'is in the fixed position on the left side farthest from the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is opened and the V prize of the game ball to the specific area 38A is given. Make it easy. At this time, the displacement member 39'forms a gap between the displacement member 39'and the right wall of the ball passage 37B through which the game ball can sufficiently pass. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B can be guided downward through between the right wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'and pass through the specific area 38A. is there. Further, when the displacement member 39'is in a fixed position on the left side, a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the left wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B may pass between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'and pass through the non-specific region 38B.

When the specific area is opened, the displacement member may be moved to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. Further, when the specific area is opened, the first position of the displacement member such that the game ball can pass through the non-specific area and the first position of the displacement member such that the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. The displacement member may be placed at any of the two positions, and the displacement member may be controlled to move to the first position or the second position according to the game mode or the like. For example, when the displacement member is placed in the second position, the game ball always passes through a specific area if a prize is won in the large winning opening, so that the game is more advantageous to the player than the one according to the above-described embodiment. Modes can be provided.

On the other hand, as shown by a virtual line in FIG. 66, when the displacement member 39'is in the fixed position on the right side closest to the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is closed and the game ball to the specific area 38A. V prize is made impossible. At this time, the displacement member 39'forms a gap through which the game ball can pass between the displacement member 39'and the left wall of the ball passage 37B. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and always passes through the non-specific area 38B. It becomes.

Even in a pachinko gaming machine using such a displacement member 39', it is possible to shift to a probabilistic gaming state or the like after the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is successfully completed in the jackpot gaming state. That is, according to the large winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 66, even when only one large winning opening (variable winning device) is provided, it is relatively difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A. Since it is possible to execute a one-round game and a specific second-round game that makes it relatively easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, two large winning openings (variable winning devices) are placed on the game board. ) Is difficult to secure, but it is easy to shift to the special gaming state according to the opening pattern of the large winning opening (variable winning device) in the specific gaming state, or It is possible to provide a game machine having a game property that makes it difficult.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing pattern (modification example) of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a displacement member operation pattern corresponding to the large winning opening opening / closing pattern of FIG. 67. The large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are applied to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 66.

As shown in FIG. 67, the modified example of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern is basically the same as the large winning opening opening / closing pattern shown in FIG. 11, and is applied to one large winning opening provided with a specific area. It is a possible big winning opening opening and closing pattern. In such a large winning opening opening / closing pattern, as shown in FIG. 68, the displacement member 39'that opens / closes the specific area 38A is set to the operating state only at the 4th round as an example, and is in the position shown by the solid line in FIG. Become. On the other hand, at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 12th rounds, the displacement member 39'is in an inactive state and is in a state shown by a virtual line in FIG. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which such a large winning opening opening / closing pattern is applied to one large winning opening, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be realized.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. This special symbol control process is a pachinko gaming machine in which the main CPU determines whether or not to shift to the probabilistic gaming state according to the type of jackpot symbol without providing a specific area while providing only one big winning opening. It is applied to.

As shown in FIG. 69, first, in S1000, the main CPU performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, when no data is stored in the special symbol start storage area (0) to the special symbol start storage area (4), the data is stored. This process is repeated until it is stored. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that there is a start memory, it shifts the process to S1001.

In S1001, the main CPU executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU uses a jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values or a low probability determination table with a small number of jackpot determination values, depending on whether or not the game status flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Refer to the jackpot judgment table of. Further, the main CPU refers to the hit determination random value in the special symbol start storage area and the selected jackpot determination table, which is extracted when the game ball wins a prize. Then, when the hit determination random value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. That is, the main CPU determines whether or not the jackpot game state is favorable to the player. That is, as a result of the special symbol game, either a big hit or a loss is determined. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1002.

In S1002, the main CPU determines whether or not the determination result of S1001 is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S1003. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that it is not a big hit, that is, when it determines that it is not a big hit, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000.

In S1003, the main CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, the main CPU executes a large winning opening opening display command, a large winning opening opening data set, and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the control of the jackpot gaming state executed in S1003 is based on the special symbol of the probability variation jackpot. If it is determined that it is based on the special symbol of the probabilistic jackpot, the process is transferred to S1006. If it is determined that it is not based on the special symbol of the probabilistic jackpot, the process is transferred to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU controls the non-probability changing gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state that started the control in S1003. That is, in the jackpot game state based on a special symbol other than the probability variation jackpot, the state shifts to the non-probability variation game state after the end. When the game shifts to such a non-probability game state, the main CPU shifts the process to S1000 again.

In S1006, the main CPU controls the probabilistic gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state that started the control in S1003. That is, in the big hit game state based on the special symbol of the probabilistic big hit, the state always shifts to the probabilistic game state after the end. When the state shifts to such a probabilistic gaming state, the main CPU again shifts the process to S1000.

In a pachinko gaming machine to which such a special symbol control process is applied, by providing an effect mode or the like similar to that of the above-described embodiment, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in a round in which a prize is easily entered in the large winning opening.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the present embodiment and other embodiments, the present invention is not limited thereto. That is, the specific configuration of each means provided by the present invention is not limited to the examples adopted in the above-described embodiment and other embodiments, and can be arbitrarily modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Is.

For example, the various counters and various timers shown in the present embodiment and other embodiments, which are managed by the control of the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71, appropriately adopt the management mode as long as the gist of the present invention is not deviated. Can be changed. For example, various counters and various timers managed by "addition" may be managed by "subtraction". In this case, the judgment as to whether or not it is "more than or equal to" should be read as the judgment as to whether or not it is "less than or equal to", and the judgment as to whether or not it is "more than" is "less than or equal to". It can be read as judgment. Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by "subtraction" may be managed by "addition". In this case, the judgment as to whether or not it is "less than or equal to" should be read as the judgment as to whether or not it is "more than or equal to", and the judgment as to whether or not it is "less than or equal to" is whether or not it is "more than". It can be read as judgment.

Further, for example, the various counters and various timers shown in the present embodiment and other embodiments that are managed by the control of the main CPU 61 are managed by the control of the sub CPU 71 within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. The various counters and various timers managed by the control of the sub CPU 71 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 61 within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention.

Further, for example, various gaming states managed by the control of the main CPU 61 shown in the present embodiment and other embodiments are managed by the control of the sub CPU 71 within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. The various production modes managed by the control of the sub CPU 71 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 61 within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

All the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments are applied to pachislot machines, slot machines, game machines, ball game machines and all other game machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. can do.

In particular, the pachislot machine is provided with a main control circuit and a sub control circuit, and can detect a start operation (for example, an operation to the start lever) based on the insertion of a game medium (for example, a medal). , Advantageous conditions for the player based on the start operation (eg, big bonus (BB), middle bonus (MB), regular bonus (RB), replay time (RT), assist time (AT) ), Assist replay time (ART)), or whether or not to give a predetermined profit (for example, payout of medals, operation of replay) (this judgment result is "internal winning combination". Along with the above, the rotation of a plurality of reels with identification information (for example, a plurality of symbols and symbols) is started, and a stop operation (for example, an operation for a stop button) is performed. The rotation of a plurality of reels is stopped and controlled so that the combination of symbols according to the internal winning combination is stopped, and depending on the combination of the stopped symbols, the player can shift to an advantageous state or give a predetermined profit. Therefore, it is easy to apply the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments.

That is, the invention described in the present embodiment and other embodiments includes a symbol display means (for example, a plurality of reels) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and a start operation means (for example, a start) that performs a start operation. It is displayed on the lever), the internal winning combination determining means (for example, the main control circuit) that determines the internal winning combination based on the start operation, and the symbol display means based on the start operation. The symbol variation start control means (for example, the main control circuit) for starting the variation display of the symbol, the stop operation means for performing the stop operation (for example, the stop button), the stop operation being performed, and the determined internal winning. The symbol variation stop control means (for example, the main control circuit) that stops the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display means based on the combination, and the symbol variation stop control means stop the symbol variation display by the symbol display means. A profit-giving means (for example, a main control circuit) that gives a profit according to a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, an effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) that performs an effect display, and the effect display means. It is easy to apply to a pachislot machine which is a game machine provided with an effect control means (for example, a sub control circuit or a main control circuit) for controlling the above.

1 Game board 1p Game area 4 Liquid crystal display device 32 1st starting port 33 2nd starting port 36 1st big winning opening 36A 1st big winning opening shutter 37 2nd big winning opening 37 2nd big winning opening shutter 38A Specific area 38B Non-specific area 39, 39'Displacement member 61 Main CPU
71 sub CPU
73 work RAM
83 Payout device

Claims (3)

An advantageous state determining means for determining whether or not to give an advantageous advantageous state to the player,
An identification information display means that displays a variation of the identification information based on the determination result by the advantageous state determination means.
The production execution means to perform the production and
An effect control means for controlling the effect execution means,
Equipped with an operation means capable of accepting a predetermined operation of a player,
The effect executing means can perform a specific effect, and can perform a specific effect.
The specific effect sequentially shifts a plurality of effect stages, and when the final effect stage is reached, a predetermined effect is performed.
For each of the production stages in the plurality of production stages, any one of a predetermined production stage and a specific production stage can be set.
It is configured so that the predetermined production stage may be set in the next production stage of the production stage in which the specific production stage is set.
The specific effect includes at least a first effect pattern in which the predetermined effect stage is set as the final effect stage and a second effect pattern in which the specific effect stage is set as the final effect stage. Including
The effect control means is used in the specific effect.
When the current production stage is the predetermined production stage, it is decided by lottery whether or not to move to the next production stage on the condition that the predetermined operation is performed, and according to the decision result. Move to the next production stage,
When the current production stage is the specific production stage, the gaming machine is characterized in that it always shifts to the next production stage on condition that the predetermined operation is performed after the predetermined transition condition is satisfied. .. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when a predetermined period has elapsed in the specific production stage. The second aspect of the present invention is characterized in that, in the specific effect, when the current effect stage is the specific effect stage, the operation means cannot accept the predetermined operation during the predetermined period. The game machine described.

Images